172
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE CITY OF SAN ANTONIO, TEXAS HASKIN PARK 200 HASKIN DRIVE SAN ANTONIO, TEXAS 78209 CITY COUNCIL MAYOR Ivy R. Taylor COUNCIL Roberto C. Trevino Alan E. Warrick, II Rebecca J. Viagran Rey Saldaña Shirley Gonzales Ray Lopez Cris Medina Ron Nirenberg Joe Krier Mike Gallagher FUNDING 2017-2022 Bond Program ADMINISTRATION CITY MANAGER Sheryl L. Sculley PARKS AND RECREATION DIRECTOR Xavier Urrutia PROJECT MANAGER Jamaal Moreno, PLA CITY OF SAN ANTONIO CAPITAL IMPROVEMENTS MANAGEMENT SERVICES 114 W. Commerce, 4 th Floor San Antonio, Texas 78283 Set No: __________ March 2018

HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

  • Upload
    others

  • View
    1

  • Download
    0

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

Page 1: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE CITY OF SAN ANTONIO, TEXAS

HASKIN PARK 200 HASKIN DRIVE

SAN ANTONIO, TEXAS 78209

CITY COUNCIL MAYOR Ivy R. Taylor COUNCIL Roberto C. Trevino Alan E. Warrick, II Rebecca J. Viagran Rey Saldaña Shirley Gonzales Ray Lopez Cris Medina Ron Nirenberg Joe Krier Mike Gallagher FUNDING 2017-2022 Bond Program

ADMINISTRATION

CITY MANAGER Sheryl L. Sculley

PARKS AND RECREATION

DIRECTOR Xavier Urrutia

PROJECT MANAGER Jamaal Moreno, PLA

CITY OF SAN ANTONIO CAPITAL IMPROVEMENTS MANAGEMENT SERVICES

114 W. Commerce, 4th Floor San Antonio, Texas 78283

Set No: __________ March 2018

Page 2: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

TABLE OF CONTENTS

03/26/2018

HASKIN PARK Specifications for Haskin Park are provided as reference items by item number from the City of San Antonio Standard Specifications for Construction – June 2008, San Antonio Water System Construction Specifications – April 2014 and latest revisions and the Texas Department of Transportation Standard Specifications – June 2004. These Specifications listed below are available on line. Additional Specification for Haskin Park are also supplied as complete documents as detailed on the table of contents sheet, page three of this section. City of San Antonio Standard Specifications for Construction applicable to this project: ITEM NO. DESCRIPTION 100 Mobilization 101 Preparing Right-of-Way 103 Remove Concrete 104 Street Excavation 107 Embankment 108 Lime Treated Subgrade 203 Tack Coat 204 Surface Treatments 205 Hot Mix Asphaltic Concrete Pavement 300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe 410 Subgrade Filler 500 Concrete Curb, Gutter and Concrete Curb and Gutter 502 Concrete Sidewalks 503 Asphaltic Concrete, Portland Cement Concrete and Gravel Driveways 511 Cutting and Replacing Pavements (Trench Repair) 512 Adjusting Existing Manholes and Valve Boxes 515 Topsoil 516 Sodding 522 Sidewalk Pipe Railing 523 Adjusting of Vehicular and Pedestrian Gates 526 Field Office 530 Barricades, Signs and Traffic Handling 535 Hot Applied Thermoplastic Pavement Markings 537 Raised Pavement Markers

Page 3: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

TABLE OF CONTENTS

03/26/2018

540 Temporary Erosion, Sedimentation and Water Pollution Prevention and Control

550 Trench Excavation Safety Protection 636 Aluminum Signs San Antonio Water System Standard Specifications applicable to this project: ITEM NO. DESCRIPTION 101 Preparing Right-of-Way 110 Recycle Water System 550 Trench Excavation Safety Protection 818 PVC (C-900, C-905 and C-909) Pipe Installation 824 Service Supply Lines (Water) 826 Valve Box Adjustments 828 Gate Valves 832 Tapping Sleeves and Valves 833 Meter and Meter Box Installation 841 Hydrostatic Testing Operations 1015 Service Line Breaks/Leak Repairs 1020 Water Main Breaks/Leak Repairs Backflow Prevention Assembly Installation Standards Technical Specifications: SECTION NO. DESCRIPTION NO. OF PAGES DIVISION 1 01010 Summary of the Work 3 01045 Cutting and Patching 2 01050 Field Engineering 2 01100 Alternatives 3 01110 Special Provisions 3 01340 Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples 4 01380 Construction Photographs 2 01410 Testing Laboratory Services 4 01520 Construction Aids 1 01568 Erosion and Sediment Control 8 01620 Storage and Protection 2 01630 Product Options and Substitutions 2 01732 Demolition 4

Page 4: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

TABLE OF CONTENTS

03/26/2018

SECTION NO. DESCRIPTION NO. OF PAGES DIVISION 2 02010 Subsurface Investigation 1 02110 Clearing 3 02210 Grading 6 02212 Concrete Removal 1 02220 Excavating, Backfilling and Compacting for Site 7 02226 Excavating, Backfilling and Compacting for Pavement 5 02231 Tree Protection and Trimming 5 328400 Irrigation 9 02950 Trees, Plants, Ground Cover & Turf 7 02970 Landscape Maintenance 6 DIVISION 3 03100 Concrete Formwork 5 03163 Drilled Concrete Piers and Shafts 5 03200 Concrete Reinforcement 4 03300 Cast-in-Place Concrete 9

DIVISION 5 05118 Steel and Welding 3 05501 Metal Fabrications Galvanized 4 DIVISION 7 07920 Sealants and Caulking 5

DIVISION 9 09912 Painting 10 09860 Anti-Graffiti Coating 5 09963 Elastomeric Sealers 12

Page 5: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

TABLE OF CONTENTS

03/26/2018

SECTION NO. DESCRIPTION NO. OF PAGES DIVISION 15 15050 Basic Materials and Methods 19 15061 Pipe and Pipe Fittings 5 15260 Piping Insulation 5 15410 Plumbing and Piping Valves 14 DIVISION 16 16050 Basic Materials and Methods 17 16110 Raceways 6 16120 Wire Cable and Related Materials 4

Page 6: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 1 SUMMARY OF THE WORK – 01010

Page 1

03/23/2018

SECTION 01010 - SUMMARY OF THE WORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. Furnish labor, materials, tools, appliances, services and facilities; perform work and services for accomplishment and completion of all work of construction indicated on drawings and described in these specifications, in accordance with all portions of Contract Documents, Change Orders issued thereto, and Building Code.

1. Items of work or materials indicated on drawings as “Not in Contract (NIC)” or mentioned in specifications to be furnished by Owner are not to be included in proposal.

2. Contractor cooperates with others employed separately by Owner for particular equipment installation or performing special work relating to this project, and shall protect all such installation or materials in accordance with General Conditions.

3. Owner retains right at all times to deliver, place, and install materials as work progresses where there is no interference with Contractor. Such preliminary occupancy shall not be construed as acceptance of such portions.

B. Drawings will indicate dimensions, position and kinds of construction.

1. Indication of the drawings or mention in the specifications of articles, operations or methods requires that the Contractor provide each item indicated or mentioned of the quality, or subject to the qualifications noted; perform according to conditions stated for each operation described; and provide all necessary labor, equipment services, and incidentals.

C. Scope

1. This project consists of furnishing all labor, materials, services, equipment and appliances required with, or properly incidental to all construction detailed in these plans which shall include, but not be limited to demolition, new utilities, concrete pedestrian trail, trail nodes, drainage, concrete parking, concrete walks, curbs, walkway trench drain, site furnishings, steel fabrication, steel installation, signage, concrete flat work, concrete foundations, concrete piers, installation of electrical work, installation of lighting fixtures, site grading, landscaping and irrigation.

D. Scheduling of the Work

1. Prior to any construction work, Contractor shall first obtain City approval for yard storage fencing and establish vehicular and pedestrian access.

1.2 LAYING OUT WORK, MEASUREMENTS

A. Contractor shall lay out their work and be responsible therefore.

B. Before ordering any materials or doing any work, the Contractor shall verify all measurements at the site and shall be responsible for the correctness of the same. Do not scale drawings.

1.3 PROJECT PROCEDURES

Page 7: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 1 SUMMARY OF THE WORK – 01010

Page 2

03/23/2018

A. Coordinate work of trades and schedule elements of work by procedures and methods to

expedite completion of Work. B. In addition to any demolition specified and that specifically shown; cut, move or

remove items as necessary to allow new work to proceed including items as follows: 1. Repair or removal of hazardous or unsanitary conditions. 2. Removal of abandoned items and items serving no useful purpose, such as but not

limited to abandoned piping, conduit and wiring. 3. Removal of unsuitable or extraneous materials such as abandoned slabs,

foundations and debris. 1.4 SCHEDULES AND REPORTS

A. Standard Forms - All documents shall be filled electronically per City of San Antonio Requirements.

1. Notice to Proceed. 2. Certificate for Payment. 3. Change Order. 4. Substantial Completion 5. Release of Liens.

B. Supplementary Schedules

1. Color schedules, related material selections, and supplementary schedules shall be furnished by the Landscape Architect.

1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Perform work in accordance with: 1. 2012 edition of the International Building / International Residential Codes

(IBC/IRC) and the 2011 edition of the National Electric Code (NEC) effective March 1, 2012

2. Federal, state, and local barrier-free access laws, codes, regulations and ordinances.

1.6 QUALITY CONTROL

A. An independent testing laboratory will perform testing services. B. Testing Laboratory shall be approved by Landscape Architect.

C. Test reports will be sent directly to the Landscape Architect by the Testing Laboratory on

the laboratory’s standard form.

D. Testing shall be paid for directly by the City of San Antonio. The cost of testing that receives a no-pass result will have the cost of the test deducted from the contract fee. Work that receives a no-pass will be removed by the contractor and the cost of retesting deducted from the contract fee.

Page 8: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 1 SUMMARY OF THE WORK – 01010

Page 3

03/23/2018

E. All testing will be made in accordance with the latest method of ASTM for specific item of

construction.

F. Limits of Laboratory Authority: 1. Laboratory may not release, revoke, alter or enlarge requirements of Contract

Documents. 2. Laboratory may not stop, approve, or accept any portion of Work. 3. Laboratory may not assume any duties of Contractor.

1.7 PROTECTION OF LIVES AND HEALTH

A. The Contractor shall comply with the U.S. Department of Labor Safety and Health Regulations for construction promulgated under the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (Public Law 91-596 and all subsequent amendments) and under Section 107 of the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act (Public Law 91-54 and all subsequent amendments).

B. The Contractor shall have a competent person or persons, as required under the

Occupational Safety and Health Act, on the site to inspect the work and to supervise the conformance of the Contractor’s operations with the regulations of the Act.

C. This project is subject to all of the Safety and health Regulations (CFR 29, Part 1926 and

all subsequent amendments) as promulgated by the E.S. Department of Labor on June 24, 1974 and CFR 29, Part 1910 and all subsequent amendments. General Industry Safety and Health Regulations Identified as Applicable to Construction. Contractors are urged to become familiar with the requirements of these regulations.

END OF SECTION

Page 9: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 1 CUTTING AND PATCHING – 01045

Page 1

03/26/2018

SECTION 01045 - CUTTING AND PATCHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section establishes general requirements pertaining to cuttings (including excavating), fitting, and patching of the Work required to: 1. Join new work to existing work. 2. Uncover work to provide for installing or inspecting. 3. Remove and replace work not conforming to requirements of the Contract

Documents 4. Remove and replace defective work.

B. Related work: 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to,

General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these specifications.

2. In addition to other requirements specified, upon the Landscape Architect's request uncover work to provide for inspection by the Landscape Architect of covered work and remove samples of installed materials for testing.

3. Do not cut or alter work performed under separate contracts without the Landscape Architect’s written permission.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Request for Landscape Architect's consent: 1. Prior to cutting which affects structural safety, submit written request to the

Landscape Architect for permission to proceed with cutting. 2. Should conditions of the Work indicate a required change of materials or methods

for cutting and patching other than those identified in the specifications or on the plans, so notify the Landscape Architect and secure his written permission and the required Change Order prior to proceeding.

3. Secure the Landscape Architect's approval of cost estimates and type of reimbursement before proceeding with cutting and patching.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS

A. For replacement of items removed, use materials complying with the plans and pertinent Sections of these Specifications.

Page 10: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 1 CUTTING AND PATCHING – 01045

Page 2

03/26/2018

2.2 PAYMENTS FOR COSTS

A. The Owner will reimburse the Contractor for cutting and patching performed pursuant to a written Change Order, after the Contractor submits claim for such reimbursement.

B. Perform other cutting and patching needed to comply with the Contract Documents at no

additional cost to the Owner. C. Any cost caused by defective or ill-timed work shall be borne by the party responsible

therefore. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS

A. Inspection: 1. Inspect existing conditions, including elements subject to movement or damage

during cutting, excavating, patching, and backfilling. 2. After uncovering the work, inspect conditions affecting installation of new work.

B. Discrepancies: 1. If uncovered conditions are not as anticipated, immediately notify the Landscape

Architect and secure needed directions. 2. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION PRIOR TO CUTTING

A. Provide required protection including, but not necessarily limited to, shoring, bracing, and support to maintain structural integrity of the Work.

3.3 PERFORMANCE

A. Perform required excavating and backfilling as required under pertinent other Sections of these Specifications. 1. Perform cutting and demolition by methods which will prevent damage to other

portions of the Work and provide proper surfaces to receive installation of repair and new work.

2. All cutting shall be accomplished along straight and true lines as indicated on the plans and cut to the full depth of the material to be removed.

3. Perform fitting and adjusting of products to provide finished installation complying with the specified tolerances and finishes.

4. Make cuts in concrete at the nearest control or expansion joint to avoid small pieces of concrete.

PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 4.1 PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

A. No separate payment shall be made to the CONTRACTOR for the work described in this

Section. Such work shall be considered incidental to the project and the payments made under specific Pay Items shall be considered as full compensation for these requirements

END OF SECTION

Page 11: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 1 FIELD ENGINEERING – 01050

Page 1

03/26/2018

SECTION 01050 - FIELD ENGINEERING PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Provide such field engineering services as are required for proper completion of the Work including, but not necessarily limited to: 1. Establishing and maintaining lines and levels. 2. Structural design of shores, forms, and similar items provided by the Contractor as

part of his means and methods of construction.

B. Related work: 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to,

General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications.

2. Additional requirements for field engineering also may be described in other Sections of these Specifications.

3. As described in the General Conditions, the Owner will furnish survey describing the physical characteristics, legal limitations, utility locations, and legal description of the site.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01340-Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples

A. Upon request of the Landscape Architect, submit: 1. Data demonstrating qualifications of persons proposed to be engaged for field

engineering services. 2. Documentation verifying accuracy of field engineering work. 3. Certification, signed by the Contractor's retained field engineer, certifying that

elevations and locations of improvements are in conformance or nonconformance with requirements of the Contract Documents.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in

the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.

1.4 PROCEDURES

A. In addition to procedures directed by the Contractor for proper performance of the

Contractor's responsibilities: 1. Locate and protect control points before starting work on the site. 2. Preserve permanent reference points during progress of the Work. 3. Do not change or relocate reference points or items of the Work without specific

approval from the Landscape Architect. 4. Promptly advise the Landscape Architect when a reference point is lost, destroyed,

or requires relocation because of other changes in the Work.

Page 12: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 1 FIELD ENGINEERING – 01050

Page 2

03/26/2018

a. Upon direction of the Landscape Architect, require the field engineer to replace reference stakes or markers.

b. Locate such replacements according to the original survey control.

1.5 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

A. No separate payment shall be made to the CONTRACTOR for the work described in this Section. Such work shall be considered incidental to the project and the payments made under specific Pay Items shall be considered as full compensation for these requirements

END OF SECTION

Page 13: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 1 ALTERNATIVES – 01100

Page 1

03/26/2018

SECTION 01100 - ALTERNATIVES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. To enable the Owner to compare total costs where alternative materials and methods might be used, Alternatives have been established as described on the Drawings and/or in this Section of these Specifications.

B. Related work:

1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications.

2. Materials and methods to be used in the Base Bid and in the Alternatives also may be described on the Drawings and/or in pertinent other Sections of these Specifications.

3. Method for stating the proposed Contract Sum is shown on the Bid Form.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. All Alternatives described in this Section are required to be reflected on the Bid Form as submitted by the bidder.

B. Do not submit alternatives other than as described in this Section, except as provided for

"substitutions" under Section 01630- Product Options and Substitutions of these Specifications.

1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. If the Owner elects to proceed on the basis of one or more of the described Alternatives, make modifications to the Work required in providing the selected Alternative or Alternatives to the approval of the Owner and at no additional cost to the Owner except as proposed on the Bid Form.

1.4 ADVANCE COORDINATION

A. Immediately after award of the Contract, or as soon thereafter as the Owner has made a decision on which if any of the Alternatives will be selected, thoroughly and clearly advise necessary personnel and suppliers as to the nature of Alternatives selected by the Owner.

PART 2 - ADDITIVE ALTERNATES 2.1 ADDITIVE ALTERNATIVE NUMBER 1 – SITE IRRIGATION FOR ALL THE TURF AREAS

ON THE EXTERIOR PEREMITER OF THE NEW TRAIL.

A. Add Alternate No. 1 is for all the turf areas on the exterior of the new trail. The base bid for irrigation is to include turf irrigation for the playfield area, irrigating all of the shrub beds with drip tubing and watering the new trees with pop-up bubblers. Add Alternate No. 1 is for all the turf areas on the exterior of the new trail.

Page 14: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 1 ALTERNATIVES – 01100

Page 2

03/26/2018

2.2 ADDITIVE ALTERNATIVE NUMBER 2 – PROVIDE SOLID SOD FOR THE PLAYFIELD

AREA

A. Playfield upgrade to Solid Sod Tiff ‘419’ to include, but not limited to, sod, a credit for hydroseeding and all other miscellaneous materials and labor as required to install the Playfield upgrade to Solid Sod as per the plans, details and specifications.

2.3 ADDITIVE ALTERNATIVE NUMBER 3 – PARK UPGRADE TO ADD 2” DEPTH OF ADDITIONAL TOPSOIL TO THE PLAYFIELD AREA.

A. Add 2” of additional approved topsoil to include, but not limited to, the soil, mulch to mix

into the soil, equipment rental and all other miscellaneous materials and labor as required to install 2” of additional approved topsoil as per the plans, details and specifications.

PART 3 - DEDUCTIVE ALTERNATES – (No Deductive Alternates are required in this contract)

END OF SECTION

Page 15: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 1

SPECIAL PROVISIONS - 1110 Page | 1

5/24/2013

IN ALL CASES WHERE THESE SPECIAL PROVISIONS CONFLICT WITH THE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION SECTIONS, GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT, SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS, CONTRACT CONDITIONS, OR ANY OTHER DOCUMENT CONTAINED HEREIN, THESE SPECIAL PROVISIONS SHALL GOVERN. 1. The CONTRACTOR shall do all necessary excavation, trenching, dewatering, demolition, grading, backfill, etc., to complete the project. Such costs shall be subsidiary to the bid items in the Proposal. All excavation is unclassified. All material removed such as concrete, broken pipe, excess backfill, etc., and not deemed salvageable shall become the property of the CONTRACTOR and he shall be responsible for removing it from the site at no extra expense to the OWNER. Existing material, fencing or fixtures deemed salvageable by the LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT, ENGINEER or the OWNER shall be carefully removed and hauled to a designated location as directed by the OWNER, LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT or ENGINEER within the City at no extra expense to the OWNER. 2. All trees, plants, grass and shrubs, except those which will be affected by construction shall be protected at all times. The areas in and adjacent, to the construction site shall be restored to their original conditions after necessary fine grading is completed. The CONTRACTOR shall hydro seed grass of the same type removed to restore damaged areas. 3. Damages done to existing utilities, power poles, fences, signs, mailboxes, driveways, culverts, pavement, drainage systems, etc. shall be repaired by the CONTRACTOR at no cost to the OWNER, and such costs shall be subsidiary to the various unit items in the Proposal. 5. The CONTRACTOR shall be limited only to the limits of work as indicated on the plans and existing street ROW for construction operations. CONTRACTOR at no extra cost to the OWNER will correct any damages done to property outside these designated work areas to its original or better conditions. It is important that the CONTRACTOR be aware of the work limits so that no damage can result to those areas outside these limits. 6. The City of San Antonio will provide all construction material testing. The OWNER will pay for all necessary testing selected by LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT or ENGINEER, but re-testing shall be charged to the CONTRACTOR from his monthly estimates, and no additional compensation will be made or allowed for reworking the necessary defective work not meeting the specified work of the plans and specifications. Any re-testing required by no-passing results shall be paid for by the CONTRACTOR and shall be deducted from the contract amount. 7. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish the OWNER, OWNER’S Site Inspector or Observer, LANDSCAPE ARCITECT, and ENGINEER the names, address and telephone numbers of all personnel responsible for the work in case of Emergencies. 8. The successful CONTRACTOR shall attend a pre-construction conference with the OWNER, LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT, ENGINEER, PARKS AND RECREATION DEPARTMENT, and ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT and other Utility Officials at the date and time specified. 9. The CONTRACTOR shall submit to the OWNER a proposed sequence of work outline with approximate completion dates to be reviewed at the pre-construction conference. It is important that traffic be interrupted at a minimum during construction. If roadways are to be closed or detoured, the CONTRACTOR shall notify the City of San Antonio PROJECT MANAGER at least 48 hours in advance.

Page 16: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 1

SPECIAL PROVISIONS - 1110 Page | 2

5/24/2013

11. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for construction staking for the entire project and shall be done in accordance with the Specifications. Staking shall be performed by a Registered Professional Land Surveyor or Professional Engineer qualified to do such construction staking. 12. The CONTRACTOR is responsible for locating all existing utilities and shall exercise extreme care in working in the vicinity of these lines. All existing lines shall remain in operation at all times. Switchover time, re-connecting new service from existing lines or services (if any) shall be kept to a minimum. Contractor shall be responsible for any re-connects, temporary or otherwise, of all water and sanitary sewer lines required to complete the project. Unless otherwise specified in the bid proposal form, payment for such items shall be subsidiary to all the various items of the bid. 13. The Contractor shall notify the Utility Companies while working in the vicinity of the corresponding private or public utility. 14. The OWNER reserves the right to add or delete quantities of bid items in the Proposal at the Unit Prices given 15. The CONTRACTOR is expected to conduct his work in such a manner as to minimize any soil erosion or sediment runoff from the construction site. Earth cuts and fills shall have smooth, flat side slopes, as generally indicated on the Plans, to preclude erosion of the soil. Such operations should be times consistent with the actual need for doing the work and only to leave raw, unprotected surfaces for a minimum of time. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for correcting any erosion that occurs at his cost without claim for extra compensation. 16. Until acceptance by the OWNER all of the material, as provided for in these specifications, it shall be under the charge and care of the CONTRACTOR, and he shall take every necessary precaution against injury or damage to any part of the material by action of the elements of from the non-execution of the work. The CONTRACTOR shall rebuild, repair, restore and make good, at his own expense, all injuries or damage to any portion off the material occasioned by any of the above causes before its completion and acceptance. 17. In cases where the CONTRACTOR deems extra compensation is due him for materials not clearly covered in the contract, or not ordered by the OWNER as an extra item, the CONTRACTOR shall notify the OWNER in writing of his intention to make claim for such extra compensation before he begins the work. The CONTRACTOR shall not proceed until the OWNER, LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT and ENGINEER, and CONTRACTOR approves a written CHANGE ORDER. Failure on the part of the CONTRACTOR to give such notification or to afford the OWNER proper facilities for keeping strict account of actual cost shall constitute a waiver of the claim for such extra compensation. The filing of such notice by the CONTRACTOR and the keeping of costs by the OWNER shall not in any way be construed to prove the validity of the claim. When the work has been completed, the CONTRACTOR shall, within 10 days, file his claim for extra compensation with the OWNER. 18. If the CONTRACTOR, in the course of the work, finds any discrepancy between the Drawings and the physical conditions of the locality, or any errors or omissions in Drawings or in the layout as given by survey points and instructions, he shall immediately inform the OWNER, in writing, and the OWNER shall promptly verify the same. Any work done after such discovery, until authorized by the OWNER will be done at the CONTRACTOR'S risk. 19. Upon the failure of the CONTRACTOR to repair satisfactorily or to remove and replace, if so directed, rejected, unauthorized, or condemned materials immediately after receiving formal notice from the OWNER may recover for such defective materials on the CONTRACTOR’S bond, or by action in a court having proper jurisdiction over such matters, or may employ labor and equipment and satisfactorily

Page 17: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 1

SPECIAL PROVISIONS - 1110 Page | 3

5/24/2013

repair or remove and replace such work and charge the cost of the same to the CONTRACTOR, which cost will be deducted from any money due him. 20. Contractor is responsible for all traffic control measures. All proposed routing of traffic must be approved in writing prior to implementation and be sealed by a license by a registered Professional Engineer in the State of Texas. All traffic control devices shall be in accordance with the Texas Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (TMUTCD), latest edition. 21. Saw cutting of existing asphalt or concrete for construction joints will be the only accepted method. Saw cut at the nearest control or expansion joint. 22. Mechanical tamping of all backfilling shall be the only accepted method as shown in the typical trench backfill details of the plans. 23. The CONTRACTOR shall warrant all work for a period of not less that one (1) year from the date of Substantial Completion. CONTRACTOR is responsible for scheduling a final inspection in the presence of the OWNER, LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT and ENGINEER, and CONTRACTOR, whereupon all items must be in accordance with plans and specifications, prior to final acceptance. 24. The CONTRACTOR is responsible for familiarizing himself and following all Specifications provided or referenced in this document. 25. All work will be coordinated with the City of San Antonio Capital Programs Division. 26. All work shall be performed in compliance with all federal, state, and local laws including governing bodies and guidelines. 27. Relocations of existing fences, mailboxes, driveways, culverts, pavement, drainage systems, etc. (where not indicated on plans) shall be repaired by the CONTRACTOR at no cost to the OWNER, and such costs shall be subsidiary to the various unit items in the Proposal. 28. Dewatering and trench protection shall be considered as incidental work, and the cost thereof shall be subsidiary to the various unit items in the Proposal. 29. Submittals and/or shop drawings for all bid items shall be provided to OWNER prior to construction. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT No separate payment shall be made to the CONTRACTOR for the work described in this Section. Such work shall be considered incidental to the project and the payments made under specific Pay Items shall be considered as full compensation for these requirements

END SECTION

Page 18: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 1 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES – 01340

Page 1

03/26/2018

SECTION 01340 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. Make submittals required by the Contract Documents, and revise and resubmit as necessary to establish compliance with the specified requirements, all as described in this Section.

B. Related work:

1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications.

2. Individual requirements for submittals also may be described in pertinent Sections of these Specifications.

3. The process for securing approval of proposed substitutions is described in Section 01630 - Product Options and Substitutions.

C. Work not included:

1. Unrequired submittals will not be reviewed by the Landscape Architect. 2. The Contractor may require his subcontractors to provide drawings, setting

diagrams, and similar information to help coordinate the Work, but such data shall remain between the Contractor and his subcontractors and will not be reviewed by the Landscape Architect unless specifically called for within the Contract Documents.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Make submittals of Shop Drawings, Samples, substitution requests, and other items in accordance with the provisions of this Section.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Coordination of submittals: 1. Prior to each submittal, carefully review and coordinate all aspects of each item

being submitted. 2. Verify that each item and the submittal for it conform in all respects with the

specified requirements. 3. By affixing the Contractor's signature to each submittal, certify that this

coordination has been performed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SHOP DRAWINGS

A. Scale and measurements: Make Shop Drawings accurately to a scale sufficiently large to show all pertinent aspects of the item and its method of connection to the Work.

Page 19: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 1 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES – 01340

Page 2

03/26/2018

B. Submit Shop Drawings in the form of one electronic copy of each sheet, one paper original drawing of each sheet plus six reproductions of each sheet all prepared accurately to indicated scale.

C. Review comments of the Landscape Architect will be shown on the drawings when it is

returned to the Contractor. The Contractor may make and distribute such copies as are required for his purposes.

2.2 MANUFACTURERS' LITERATURE

A. Where contents of submitted literature from manufacturers includes data not pertinent to the submittal, clearly show which portions of the contents are being submitted for review.

B. Submit six copies.

2.3 SAMPLES

A. Provide Sample or Samples identical to the precise article proposed to be provided. Identify as described under "Identification of submittals" below.

B. Number of Samples required:

1. Unless otherwise specified, submit Samples in the quantity, which is required to be returned, plus one, which will be retained by the Landscape Architect.

2. By prearrangement in specific cases, a single Sample may be submitted for review and, when approved, be installed in the work at a location agreed upon by the Landscape Architect.

2.4 COLORS AND PATTERNS

A. Unless the precise color and pattern is specifically called out in the Contract Documents, and whenever a choice of color or pattern is available in the specified products, submit accurate color and pattern charts to the Landscape Architect for selection.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 IDENTIFICATION OF SUBMITTALS

A. Consecutively number all submittals. 1. When material is resubmitted for any reason, transmit under a new letter of

transmittal and with a new transmittal number. 2. On resubmittals, cite the original submittal number for reference.

B. Accompany each submittal with a letter of transmittal showing all information required for

identification and checking least the first page of each submittal, and elsewhere as required for positive identification, show the submittal number in which the item was included.

C. On at least the first page of each submittal, and elsewhere as required for positive

identification, show the submittal number in which the item was included.

Page 20: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 1 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES – 01340

Page 3

03/26/2018

D. Submittal log: 1. Maintain an accurate submittal log for the duration of the Work, showing current

status of all submittals at all times. 2. Make the submittal log available to the Landscape Architect for the Landscape

Architect's review upon request. 3.2 GROUPING OF SUBMITTALS

A. Unless otherwise specified, make submittals in groups containing all associated items to assure that information is available for checking each item when it is received. 1. Partial submittals may be rejected as not complying with the provisions of the

Contract. 2. The Contractor may be held liable for delays so occasioned.

3.3 TIMING OF SUBMITTALS

A. Make submittals far enough in advance of scheduled dates for installation to provide time required for reviews, for securing necessary approvals, for possible revisions and resubmittals, and for placing orders and securing delivery.

B. In scheduling, allow at least ten working days for review by the Landscape Architect

following the Landscape Architect's receipt of the submittal. 3.4 REQUIRED SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals required by the Contract Documents include, but are not necessarily limited to:

01000 SPECIAL PROVISIONS 01010 SUMMARY OF WORK 02231 TREE PROTECTION AND TRIMMING 209 CONCRETE PAVEMENT 300 CONCRETE 301 REINFORCING STEEL 303 WELDED WIRE FLAT SHEETS 502 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS 515 TOPSOIL 516 SODDING 520 HYDROMULCHING 540 TEMPORARY EROSION, SEDIMENTATION AND WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION AND CONTROL

3.5 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

A. No separate payment shall be made to the CONTRACTOR for the work described in this Section. Such work shall be considered incidental to the project and the payments made under specific Pay Items shall be considered as full compensation for these requirements

END OF SECTION

Page 21: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 1 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS – 01380

Page 1

03/26/2018

SECTION 01380 - CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. Provide photographs taken at the specified stages during construction, and in accordance with provisions of this Section.

B. Related work:

1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01340. B. Except as otherwise directed photos may be submitted electronically as digital images.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS

A. Except as otherwise directed photos may be submitted electronically as digital images. B. Include with each photo:

1. Job name 2. Location from which photographed 3. Date of photograph

C. Do not permit copies to be issued for any other purpose without specific written approval from the Landscape Architect.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHY

A. Except at otherwise specifically approved by the Landscape Architect, make the photographs within three calendar days of the date of the Contractor’s application for progress payment. 1. To the maximum extent practicable, make photographs at approximately the same

time of day throughout progress of the Work. 2. When inclement weather is anticipated, consult with the Landscape Architect and

determine acceptable alternative arrangements.

B. Except as otherwise specifically approved by the Landscape Architect, take the photographs from three separate locations around the work.

Page 22: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 1 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS – 01380

Page 2

03/26/2018

1. Select the locations to provide diversified overall views of the Work, from positions, which are expected to remain accessible throughout progress of the Work.

2. Identify each location by word description, by marked drawing, or by such other means as acceptable to the Landscape Architect, to enable future photographs to be taken from the same position.

3. When so directed by the Landscape Architect because of the stage of construction, change one or more of the locations to new locations inside or outside the buildings as the Landscape Architect directs.

C. Make each photograph clear, in focus, with high resolution and sharpness, and with

minimum distortion.

3.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

A. No separate payment shall be made to the CONTRACTOR for the work described in this Section. Such work shall be considered incidental to the project and the payments made under specific Pay Items shall be considered as full compensation for these requirements

END OF SECTION

Page 23: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 1 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES – 01410

Page 1

03/26/2018

SECTION 01410 - TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section describes testing and inspecting required to be provided by the Contractor. B. Related work

1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications.

2. Requirements for testing may be described in various Sections of these Specifications.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. The Owner will provide the services of a soil engineer and a testing laboratory. B. The Owner will promptly distribute copies of test or inspection reports to the Landscape

Architect and the contractor. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PAYMENT FOR TESTING

A. The Owner will pay for all materials testing.

B. When tests directed by the Owner requested indicate noncompliance with the Contract Documents, all noncompliant testing and subsequent retesting occasioned by the noncompliance shall be performed by the same testing laboratory and the costs thereof shall be paid by the Contractor and deducted from the contractors next submitted pay application.

2.2 SPECIFIC TESTS AND INSPECTIONS

A. Provide all tests and inspections required by governmental agencies having jurisdiction, required by provisions of the Contract Documents, and such other tests and inspections as are directed by the Landscape Architect.

B. Tests include, but are not necessarily limited to, those described in detail in Part 3 of this

Section. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 TAKING SPECIMENS

A. The testing laboratory secure and handle all samples and specimens for testing.

3.2 COOPERATION WITH TESTING LABORATORY

Page 24: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 1 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES – 01410

Page 2

03/26/2018

A. Provide access to the Work at all times and at all locations where the Work is in progress.

Provide facilities for such access to enable the laboratory to perform its functions properly.

3.3 SOIL INSPECTING AND TESTING REQUIRED

A. Make required inspections and tests including, but not necessarily limited to: 1. Visually inspect on-site and imported fill and backfill, making such tests and

retests as are necessary to determine compliance with the Contract requirements and suitability for the proposed purpose;

2. Make field density tests on samples from in-place material as required; 3. As pertinent, inspect and test the scarifying and recompacting of cleaned subgrade;

inspect the progress of excavating, filling, and grading; make 90% density tests at fills and backfills; and verify compliance with provisions of the Contract Documents and governmental agencies having jurisdiction.

B. Make and distribute necessary reports and certificates.

3.4 CONCRETE INSPECTING AND TESTING

A. Portland cement: 1. Secure from the cement manufacturer Certificates of Compliance delivered directly

to the concrete producer for further delivery directly to the testing laboratory. 2. Require the Certificates of Compliance to positively identify the cement as to

production lot, bin or silo number, dating and routing of shipment, and compliance with the specified standards.

3. If so required by the Landscape Architect, promptly provide such other specific physical and chemical data as requested.

B. Aggregate:

1. Provide one test unless character of material changes, material is substituted, or additional test is requested by the Landscape Architect.

2. Sample from conveyor belts or batching gates at the ready-mix plant: a. Sieve analysis to determine compliance with specified standards and

grading; b. Specific gravity test for compliance with specified standards.

C. Laboratory design mix: 1. After approval of aggregate, and whenever character or source of materials is

changed, provide mix design in accordance with ACI 613. 2. Provide designs for all mixes prepared by a licensed civil engineer.

D. Molded concrete cylinders: 1. Provide three test cylinders for each 150 cu yds, or fraction thereof, of each class of

concrete of each day's placement. 2. Test one cylinder at seven days, one at 28 days, and one when so directed. 3. Report the mix, slump, gage, location of concrete in the structure, and test results. 4. Take specimens and make tests in accordance with the applicable ASTM standard

specifications.

Page 25: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 1 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES – 01410

Page 3

03/26/2018

E. Core tests:

1. Provide only when specifically so directed by the Landscape Architect because of low cylinder test results.

2. Cut from locations directed by the Landscape Architect, securing in accordance with ASTM C42r and prepare and test in accordance with ASTM C39.

F. Placement inspections:

1. On concrete over 2000 psi, provide continuous or other inspection as required by governmental agencies having jurisdiction.

2. Throughout progress of concrete placement, make slump tests to verify conformance with specified slump.

3. Using all required personnel and equipment, throughout progress of concrete placement verify that finished concrete surfaces will have the level or slope that is required by the Contract Documents.

3.5 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT INSPECTING AND TESTING

A. Prior to use, test all reinforcement steel bars for compliance with the specified standards. 1. Material identified by mill test reports, and certified by the testing laboratory, does

not require additional testing. 2. Require the supplier to furnish mill test reports to the testing laboratory for

certification. 3. Tag identified steel at the supplier's shop. 4. When steel arrives at the job site without such tags, test it as unidentified steel.

B. Unidentified steel: 1. Have the testing laboratory select samples consisting of two pieces, each 18" long,

of each size. 2. Have the testing laboratory make one tensile test and one bend test for each 2-1/2

tons or fraction thereof of each size of unidentified steel.

C. Provide continuous inspection for all welding of reinforcement steel.

3.6 STRUCTURAL STEEL INSPECTING AND TESTING

A. Prior to use, test all structural steel for compliance with the specified standards. 1. Material identified by mill test reports, and certified by the testing laboratory, does

not require additional testing. 2. Require the supplier to furnish mill test reports to the laboratory for certification. 3. Tag identified steel at the supplier's shop. 4. When steel arrives at the job site without such tags, test it as unidentified steel.

B. Unidentified steel: 1. Have testing laboratory make one tensile test and one bend test for each five tons or

fraction thereof of each shape and size of unidentified structural steel.

C. Shop welding: 1. Provide qualified testing laboratory inspector.

Page 26: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 1 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES – 01410

Page 4

03/26/2018

2. On single pass welds; inspect after completion of welding and prior to painting. 3. On multiple pass welds, and on butt welds with cover pass on the backside, provide

continuous inspection.

D. Field welding: Provide continuous inspection by a qualified testing laboratory inspector.

3.7 ROOFING AND WATERPROOFING INSPECTING AND TESTING

A. Prior to start of membrane waterproofing and membrane roofing installation, conduct a job site meeting attended by representatives of the installing subcontractors, the Contractor's field superintendent, the testing laboratory inspector, and the Landscape Architect, to agree upon procedures to be followed.

B. Prior to start of installation, verify that materials at the job site comply with the specified

standards, that the subcontractor is qualified to the extent specified, and that the installing personnel are fully informed as to procedures to be followed.

C. During installation, verify that materials are installed in strict accordance with the

manufacturers’ recommendations as approved by the Landscape Architect.

D. When so directed by the Landscape Architect, make test cuts to verify conformance with the specified requirements.

3.8 WAIVER OF INSPECTION AND/OR TESTS

A. Specified inspections and/or tests may be waived only by the specific approval of the Landscape Architect, and such waivers will be expected to result in credit to the Owner equal to normal cost of such inspection and/or test.

3.9 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

A. No separate payment shall be made to the CONTRACTOR for the work described in this Section. Such work shall be considered incidental to the project and the payments made under specific Pay Items shall be considered as full compensation for these requirements.

END OF SECTION

Page 27: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 1 CONSTRUCTION AIDS – 01520

Page 1

03/26/2018

SECTION 01520 – CONSTRUCTION AIDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: scaffolds, staging, ladders, stairs, ramps, runways, platforms, railings, hoists, cranes, chutes and other construction aids and equipment required to facilitate execution of the Work and later removed upon completion of the Work.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with federal, state and local codes and standards. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS

A. Materials may be new or used and shall be suitable for the intended purpose. Comply with requirements of applicable codes and standards.

B. Maintain facilities, materials and equipment in a first-class condition.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PERFORMANCE

A. Review site conditions, adjacent properties and other factors influencing or affected by construction procedures and construction aids.

B. Comply with applicable requirements specified in other sections. C. Relocate construction aids as required by progress of construction, storage requirements or

to accommodate requirements of the City or other Contractors employed at the site. D. Remove construction aids when construction needs are met by use of permanent

construction or at completion of project. E. Repair damage caused by installation and use of construction aids. F. Remove foundations and underground installations installed for construction aids.

3.5 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

A. No separate payment shall be made to the CONTRACTOR for the work described in this Section. Such work shall be considered incidental to the project and the payments made under specific Pay Items shall be considered as full compensation for these requirements

END OF SECTION

Page 28: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 1 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL – 01568

Page 1

3/26/2018

01568 - EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. Provide Erosion and Sediment Control where shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation. Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to provide erosion and sediment control for the duration of the construction period including furnishing, installing and maintaining erosion and sediment control structures and procedures and the proper removal when no longer required.

The intent of this specification is to provide guidelines for the Contractor to adhere to all

State, Federal, and Local environmental regulations. It is also the intent to provide preventive measures to keep sediment from entering any storm water system, including open channels. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to adhere to all State, Federal and Local requirements. While the Owner may require the Contractor to install erosion control devices during construction, this will in no way relieve the Contractor of his responsibility.

B. Related work:

1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications.

2. Section 02110 - Clearing. 3. Section 02210: Grading.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01340.

B. Product data: Within 35 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's Notice to Proceed, submit: 1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section; 2. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with

the specified requirements; 3. Shop Drawings showing details of bars, anchors, and other items, if any, provided

under this Section. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.

B. Comply with applicable requirements of all governing authorities having jurisdiction. The

Specifications and the Plans are not represented as being comprehensive, but rather to convey the intent to provide complete slope protection and erosion control for both the Owner’s and adjacent property.

C. Erosion control measures shall be established at the beginning of construction and

Page 29: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 1 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL – 01568

Page 2

3/26/2018

maintained during the entire length of construction. On-site areas which are subject to severe erosion and off-site areas which are especially vulnerable to damage from erosion and/or sedimentation are to be identified and receive additional erosion control measures as directed by the Owner or the Engineer.

D. All land-disturbing activities shall be planned and conducted to minimize the size of the

area to be exposed at any one time and to minimize the time of exposure. D. Surface water runoff originating upgrade of exposed area shall be controlled to reduce

erosion and sediment loss during the period of exposure. E. When the increase in the peak rates and velocity of storm water runoff resulting from a

land-disturbing activity is sufficient to cause accelerated erosion of the receiving ditch or stream, the Contractor shall install measures to control both the velocity and rate of release so as to minimize accelerated erosion and increased sedimentation of the stream as directed by the Owner or the Engineer.

F. All land-disturbing activities shall be planned and conducted so as to minimize off-site

sedimentation damage. C. The Contractor shall be responsible for periodically cleaning out and disposing of all

sediment once the storage capacity of the drainage feature or structure receiving the sediment is reduced by one-half. The Contractor shall also be responsible for cleaning out and disposing of all sediment at the time of completion of the Work.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Delivery and storage: 1. Use necessary precautions to maintain identification after bundles are broken. 2. Store in a manner to prevent excessive rusting and fouling with dirt, grease, and

other bond-breaking coatings. 1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals shall include:

B. Manufacturer’s Literature: Descriptive data of installation methods and procedures C. Certificates: Manufacturer’s certification that materials meet specification requirements

1.6 JOB CONDITIONS; CODES AND ORDINANCES

Comply with the local codes and ordinances. If local codes and ordinances require more stringent or additional erosion and sediment control measures during construction, Contractor shall provide such measures.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Page 30: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 1 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL – 01568

Page 3

3/26/2018

2.1 MATERIALS A. STRAW BALES: Straw bales shall weigh a minimum of fifty (50) pounds and shall be

at least 30” in length. Bales shall be composed entirely of vegetable matter and be free of seeds. Binding shall be either wire or nylon string, jute or cotton binding is unacceptable. Bales shall be used for not more than three months before being replaced. However, if weather conditions cause biological degradation of the straw bales, they shall be replaced sooner than the three month time period to prevent a loss of structural integrity of the dike.

B. SILT FENCE: Silt fence fabric shall be a nylon reinforced polypropylene fabric which

has a built-in cord running the entire length of the top edge of the fabric. The fabric must meet the following minimum criteria:

Tensile Strength, ASTM D4632 90 lbs. Puncture Rating, ASTM D4833 60 lbs. Mullen Burst Rating, ASTM D3786 200 psi. Apparent Opening Size, U.S. Sieve No. 40

Silt fence shall be “Enviro Fence” preassembled silt fence, AMXCO Silt Stop prefabricated silt fence, AMOCO Style 2155 preassembled silt fence or approved equal.

C. SILT FENCE POSTS: A minimum 2” x 2” (nominal) x 54” pressure treated wood posts

of Number 2 Grade southern yellow pine or approved equal. D. SAND BAG: Sand bag material shall be polypropylene, polyethylene, polyamide or

cotton burlap woven fabric, minimum unit weight four (4) ounces per square yard, mullen burst strength exceeding 300 psi and ultraviolet stability exceeding 70%. Length shall be 24 to 30 inches, width shall be l6 to 18 inches and thickness shall be six (6) to eight (8) inches and having an approximate weight of 40 pounds. Sand bags shall be filled with coarse grade sand, free from deleterious material. All sand shall pass through a No. 10 sieve.

E. P.V.C. PIPE: Pipe shall be SDR-35 polyvinyl chloride having a minimum nominal

internal diameter of 4”. Pipes shall be sized for anticipated flows. F. SOIL RETENTION BLANKET: Soil retention blankets shall consist of a geocomposite

of excelsior or fiber blanket with an extruded plastic net attached to the tope side. The plastic net shall be photodegradable and the excelsior or fiber blanket shall be made smolder resistant without the use of chemicals. Soil retention blankets shall be high velocity type to resist severe runoff. The soil retention blanket shall be one (1) of the following classes and types: 1. Class 1. “Slope Protection”

(a) Type A. Slopes of 3:1 or flatter-Clay soils (b) Type B. Slopes of 3:1 or flatter - Sandy soils (c) Type C. Slopes steeper than 3:1 - Clay soils (d) Type D. Slopes steeper than 3:1 - Sandy soils

2. Class 2. “Flexible Channel Liner” (a) Type E. Short-term duration (Up to 2 Years) Shear Stress (td) <1.0 lb./sq. ft.

Page 31: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 1 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL – 01568

Page 4

3/26/2018

(b) Type F. Short-term duration (Up to 2 Years) Shear Stress (td) 1.0 to 2.0 lb./sq. ft. (c) Type C. Long-term duration (Longer than 2 Years) Shear Stress (td)> 2.0 to < 5.0 lb./sq. ft. (d) Type H. Long-term duration (Longer than 2 Years) Shear Stress (td) greater than 0 Equal to 5.0 lb/sq. ft.

G. CLASS I. SLOPE PROTECTION: The Contractor has the option of selecting an approved

soil retention blanket provided that selection conforms to the following list of approved soil retention blankets for slope protection applications:

1. TYPE A: Slopes of 3: I or Flatter- Clay Soils

Airtrol® ANTI-WASH®/GEOJUTE® (Regular) Contech Standards® Contech Standards Plus® Green Triangle Regular® Green Triangle Superior® GREENSTREAK® PEC MAT Curlex® North American Green® S150 North American Green® S75 North American Green® SC 150 POLYJUTEÔ 4O7/GT SOIL SAVER® TerraJute® Verdyol® ERO-MAT® Xcel Regular® Xcel Superior®

2. TYPE B: Slopes of 3:1 or Flatter-Sandy Soils Contech Standards® Contech Standards Plus® GEOCOIR®/DEKOWE® 700 Green Triangle Superior® Green Triangle Regular® North American Green® 575 North American Green® SC 150 North American Green® S150 POLYJUTEO 407/CT TerraJute® Verdyol® ERO-MAT® XceI Superior® XceI Regular®

3. TYPE C: Slopes Steeper than 3:1-Clay Soils Airtrol®

ANTI-WASH®/GEOJUTE® (Regular) Contech Standards Plus® Curlex® Green Triangle Superior®

GREENSTREAK® PEC-MAT

Page 32: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 1 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL – 01568

Page 5

3/26/2018

North American Green® SC 150 North American Green® S150 POLYJUTEÔ 407/CT SOIL SAVER® TerraJute® Xcel Superior®

4. TYPE D: Slopes Steeper than 3:1-Sandy Soils Contech Standards Plus®

GEOCOIR®/DEKOWE®700 Green Triangle Superior® North American Green®S150 North American Green®SC150 POLYJUTEÔ 407GT TerraJute®

Xcel Superior®

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

A. TEMPORARY STRAW BALE DIKE 1. Straw bales shall be embedded a minimum of 4” and securely anchored using 2”

x 2” wood stakes driven through the bales into the ground a minimum of 6” Straw bales are to be placed directly adjacent to one another leaving no gap between them.

2. Bales shall be placed in a single row, lengthwise on proposed line, with ends of adjacent bales tightly abutting one another. In swales and ditches, the barrier shall extend to such a length that the bottoms of the end bales are higher in elevation than the top of the lowest middle bale. Additional bales shall be placed behind the first row where the bales abut each other. The additional bale is used to prevent unfiltered runoff from escaping between the bales.

3. The-excavated soil shall be backfilled against the barrier. Backfill shall conform to ground level on the downhill side and shall be built up to 4” above ground level on the uphill side. Loose straw shall be scattered over the area immediately uphill from a straw barrier.

B. SILT FENCE

The purpose of a silt fence is to intercept and detain water-borne sediment from unprotected areas to a limited extent. The Contractor shall excavate a 6” by 6” trench for site fence bedding along the lower perimeters of the site where necessary to prevent sediment from entering any drainage system. The Contractor shall install the silt fence in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and instructions. Silt fence is used during the period of construction near the perimeter of a disturbed area to intercept sediment while allowing water to percolate through. This fence shall remain in place until the disturbed area is permanently stabilized. Silt fence should not be used where there is a concentration of water in a channel or drainage way or where soil conditions prevent a minimum toe-in depth of 6” or installation of support post to depth of 12”. Fabric shall overlap at abutting ends a minimum of 3’ and shall be jointed such that no leakage or bypass occurs. If concentrated flow occurs after installation, corrective action must be taken such as placing rock berm in the areas of concentrated flow.

Page 33: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 1 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL – 01568

Page 6

3/26/2018

C. SAND BAG BERM

1. The purpose of a sandbag berm is to intercept sediment-laden water from disturbed areas such as construction in steam beds, create a retention pond, detain sediment and release water in sheet flow.

2. A temporary sand bag berm shall be installed across a channel or right of way in a developing or disturbed area and should be used when the contributing drainage area is greater than 5 acres. The berm shall be a minimum height of 18”, measured from the top of the existing ground at the upslope toe to the top of the berm. The berm shall be sized to have a minimum width of 48” measured at the bottom of the berm and 18” measured at the top of the berm.

3. The sand bag berm shall be inspected after each rain. The sand bags shall be reshaped or replaced as needed during inspection. Additional inspections shall be made daily by the responsible party and when the silt reaches 6”; the accumulated silt shall be removed and disposed of at an approved site in a manner that will not contribute to additional siltation. The sand bag berm shall be left in place until all upstream areas are stabilized and accumulated silt removed; removal must be done by hand.

D. SOIL RETENTION BLANKETS

1. A soil retention blanket (SRB) is a geotextile or biodegradable fabric placed over disturbed areas to limit the effects of erosion due to rainfall impact and runoff across barren soil. Soil retention blankets are manufactured by a wide variety of vendors addressing a wide variety of conditions such as vegetation establishment and high velocity flow. Blankets are used in areas which are difficult to stabilize such as steep slopes, drainage swales or high pedestrian traffic areas.

2. The soil retention blanket, whether installed as slope protection or as flexible channel liner, shall be placed within 24 hours after seeding or sodding operations have been completed, or as approved by the Engineer. Prior to placing the blanket, the area to be covered shall be relatively free of all rocks or clods over 1-1/2” in maximum dimension and all sticks or other foreign material which will prevent the close contact of the blanket with the soil. The area shall be smooth and free of ruts and other depressions. If as a result of rain, the prepared bed becomes crusted or eroded or if any eroded places, ruts or depressions exist for any reason, the Contractor shall be required to rework the soil until it is smooth and to reseed or resod the area at the Contractor’s expense.

3. Installation and anchorage of the soil retention blanket shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.

E. PROTECTION OF BARE AREAS

1. Apply seeding and soil retention blanket to bare areas including new embankment areas, fills, stripped areas, graded areas or otherwise disturbed areas, which have a grade greater than 5% or which will be exposed for more than 30 days.

2. Bare working areas on which it is not practical or desirable to install seeding and soil retention blankets, as determined by the Engineer, such as areas under proposed building slabs, shall be temporarily sloped to drain at a minimum of 0.2% and a maximum of 5% grade. These areas shall then be “track walked” with a crawler dozer traveling up and down the slope to form the effect of small

Page 34: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 1 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL – 01568

Page 7

3/26/2018

“terraces” with the tracks of the dozer. Apply a minimum of three (3) coverages to each area with the dozer tracks.

3. Route runoff from the areas through the appropriate silt fence system. 4. Protect earth spoil areas by “trackwalking” and silt fences.

F. INTERCEPTOR SWALE

1. Interceptor swales may have a v-shape or be trapezoidal with a flat bottom and side slopes of 3:1 or flatter. These are used to shorten the length of exposed slope by intercepting runoff and can also serve as perimeter swales preventing off-site runoff from entering the disturbed area or prevent sediment-laden runoff from leaving the construction site or disturbed area. The outflow from a swale must be directed to a stabilized outlet or sediment trapping device. The swales should remain in place until the disturbed area is permanently stabilized.

2. Stone Stabilization shall be used when grades exceed 2% or velocities exceed 6’ per second and shall consist of a layer of crushed stone 3” thick, or flexible channel liner soil retention blankets. Stabilization shall extend across the bottom of the swale and up both sides of the channel to minimum height of)” above the design water surface elevation based on a two year storm.

3. lnterceptor swale shall be installed across exposed slopes during construction and should intercept no more than five (5) acres of runoff. Swales shall have a minimum bottom width of 2’-O” and a maximum depth of 1-6” with side slopes of3:1 or flatter. Swale must have positive drainage for its entire length to an outlet. When the slope exceeds 3%, or velocities exceed 4’ per second (regardless of slope), stone stabilization is required. Check dams are also recommended to reduce velocities in the swales possibly reducing the amount of stabilization necessary. Swales should be inspected on a weekly basis during wet weather and repairs should be made promptly to maintain a consistent cross section.

4. All trees, brush, stumps, obstructions and other material shall be removed and disposed of so as not to interfere with the proper functioning of the swale.

5. The swale shall be excavated or shaped to line, grade, and cross-section as required to meet criteria specified herein and be free of bank projections or other irregularities which will impede normal flow.

6. All earth removed and not needed in construction shall be disposed of in an approved spoils site so that it will be conveyed to a sediment trapping device.

7. Diverted runoff from a disturbed or exposed upland area shall be conveyed to a sediment trapping device.

8. The on-site location may need to be adjusted to meet field conditions in order to utilize the most suitable outlet.

9. Minimum compaction for the swale shall be 90% standard proctor.

G. LOCATION OF EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL STRUCTURES 1 Locate erosion and sediment control structures as required to prevent erosion and

removal of sediment from the project site. Silt fences shall be required for disturbed areas and soil stockpiles/spoil areas. Each silt fence installation shall have a minimum net length (exclusive of embedments into diversion dikes or other ineffective areas) of2S’. The runoff from a maximum of one (l) acre of disturbed area or soil stockpile/ spoil area shall be routed through any individual silt fence installation.

2. Install diversion dikes to divert runoff to the silt fence installation. 3. Install silt traps at the inlet (upstream) end of the drainage structures, including

Page 35: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 1 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL – 01568

Page 8

3/26/2018

open channels, through which runoff from disturbed areas or soil stockpiles/spoil areas may drain.

4. Provide an overall erosion and sediment control system which protects disturbed areas and soil stockpiles/spoil areas. The system shall be modified by the Contractor from time to time to effectively control erosion and sediment during construction.

3.2 MAINTENANCE

A. Maintain erosion and sediment control structures and procedures in full working order at all times during construction. This shall include any necessary repair or replacement of items which have become damaged or ineffective. Remove sediment on a regular basis which accumulates in sediment control devices and place the material in approved earth spoil areas or return the material to the area from which it eroded.

B. Upon completion of construction, properly remove the temporary erosion and

sediment control structures and complete the area as indicated. C. Soil retention blankets will not require removal if installed on a finished graded

area specified to receive seeding.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

In the event of conflict between the requirements and storm water pollution control laws, rules or regulations or other Federal, State or Local agencies, the more restrictive laws, rules or regulations shall apply.

PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

A. No separate payment shall be made to the CONTRACTOR for the work described in this

Section. Such work shall be considered incidental to the project and the payments made under specific Pay Items shall be considered as full compensation for these requirements

END OF SECTION

Page 36: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 1 STORAGE AND PROTECTION – 01620

Page 1

03/26/2018

SECTION 01620 - STORAGE AND PROTECTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. Protect products scheduled for use in the Work by means including, but not necessarily limited to, those described in this Section.

B. Related work:

1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications.

2. Additional procedures also may be prescribed in other Sections of these Specifications.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Include within the Contractor’s quality assurance program such procedures as are required to assure full protection of work and materials.

1.3 MANUFACTURERS' RECOMMENDATIONS

A. Except as otherwise approved by the Landscape Architect, determine and comply with manufacturers’ recommendations on product handling, storage, and protection.

1.4 PACKAGING

A. Deliver products to the job site in their manufacturer’s original container, with labels intact and legible. 1. Maintain packaged materials with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. 2. Promptly remove damaged material and unsuitable items from the job site, and

promptly replace with material meeting the specified requirements, at no additional cost to the Owner.

B. The Landscape Architect may reject as non-complying such material and products that do

not bear identification satisfactory to the Landscape Architect as to manufacturer, grade, quality, and other pertinent information.

1.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect finished surfaces, including jambs and soffits of openings used as passageways, through which equipment and materials are handled.

B. Provide protection for finished floor surfaces in traffic areas prior to allowing equipment or

materials to be moved over such surfaces.

C. Maintain finished surfaces clean, unmarred, and suitably protected until accepted by the Owner.

Page 37: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 1 STORAGE AND PROTECTION – 01620

Page 2

03/26/2018

1.6 REPAIRS AND REPLACEMENTS

A. In event of damage, promptly make replacements and repairs to the approval of the Landscape Architect and at no additional cost to the Owner.

B. Additional time required to secure replacements and to make repairs will not be considered

by the Landscape Architect to justify an extension in the Contract Time of Completion.

PART 2 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. No separate payment shall be made to the CONTRACTOR for the work described in this

Section. Such work shall be considered incidental to the project and the payments made under specific Pay Items shall be considered as full compensation for these requirements

END OF SECTION

Page 38: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 1 PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITIONS – 01630

Page 1

03/26/2018

SECTION 01630 - PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section describes product options available to bidders and the Contractor, plus procedures for securing approval of proposed substitutions.

B. Related work:

1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications.

2. Make submittals in accordance with pertinent provisions of Section 01340.

1.2 PRODUCT OPTIONS

A. The Contract is based on standards of quality established in the Contract Documents. 1. In agreeing to the terms and conditions of the Contract, the Contractor has accepted

a responsibility to verify that the specified products will be available and to place orders for all required materials in such a timely manner as is needed to meet his agreed construction schedule.

2. Neither the Owner nor the Landscape Architect has agreed to the substitution of materials or methods called for in the Contract Documents, except as they may specifically otherwise state in writing.

B. Materials and/or methods specified by name:

1. Where materials and/or methods are specified by naming one single manufacturer and/or model number, without stating that equal products will be considered, only the material and/or method named is approved for incorporation into the Work.

2. Should the Contractor demonstrate to the approval of the Landscape Architect that a specified material or method was ordered in a timely manner and will not be available in time for incorporation into this Work, the Contractor shall submit to the Landscape Architect such data on proposed substitute materials and/or methods as are needed to help the Landscape Architect determine suitability of the proposed substitution.

C. Where materials and/or methods are specified by name and/or model number, followed by

the words "or an equal approved in advance by the Landscape Architect": 1. The material and/or method specified by name establishes the required standard

of quality; 2. Materials and/or methods proposed by the Contractor to be used in lieu of

materials and/or methods so specified by name shall in all ways equal or exceed the qualities of the named materials and/or methods;

3. Proposed substitutions shall be described on form 00440 submitted at time of General Contract bid.

D. The following products do not require further approval except for interface within the

Work:

Page 39: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 1 PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITIONS – 01630

Page 2

03/26/2018

1. Products specified by reference to standard specifications such as ASTM and similar standards;

2. Products specified by manufacturer’s name and catalog model number.

E. Where the phrase "or equal," or "or equal as approved by the Landscape Architect," occurs in the Contract Documents, do not assume that the materials, equipment, or methods will be approved as equal unless the item has been specifically so approved for this Work by the Landscape Architect.

F. The decision of the Landscape Architect shall be final.

1.3 REIMBURSEMENT OF LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT'S COSTS

A. In the event substitutions are proposed to the Landscape Architect after the Contract has been awarded, the Landscape Architect will record all time used by the Landscape Architect and the Landscape Architect’s consultants in evaluating each such proposed substitution.

B. Whether or not the Landscape Architect approves a proposed substitution, the Contractor

promptly upon receipt of the Landscape Architect's billing shall reimburse the Landscape Architect at the rate of three and one-half times the direct cost to the Landscape Architect and the Landscape Architect’s consultants for all time spent by them in evaluating the proposed substitution.

1.4 DELAYS

A. Delays in construction arising by virtue of the of a specified material not being available and/or method will not be considered by the Landscape Architect as justifying an extension of the agreed Time of Completion.

PART 2 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

A. No separate payment shall be made to the CONTRACTOR for the work described in this

Section. Such work shall be considered incidental to the project and the payments made under specific Pay Items shall be considered as full compensation for these requirements

END OF SECTION

Page 40: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 1 DEMOLITION –01732

Page 1

3/26/2018

SECTION 01732 – DEMOLITION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. Provide Demolition where shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation.

B. This specification shall provide for the removal and disposal of old structures or portions

of old structures, as noted on the plans, and shall include all excavation and backfilling necessary to complete the removal. The work shall be done in accordance with the provisions of these specifications.

C. Related work:

1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications.

2. Section 02110 - Clearing. 3. Section 02010 – Subsurface Investigation 4. Section 02210 - Grading

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01340.

B. Product data: Within 35 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's Notice to Proceed, submit: 1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section; 2. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance

with the specified requirements; 3. Shop Drawings showing details of bars, anchors, and other items, if any,

provided under this Section. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.

B. Comply with pertinent provisions of the following, except as may be modified herein.

1. ACI 318; 2. CRSI "Manual of Standard Practice."

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01520.

B. Delivery and storage: 1. Use necessary precautions to maintain identification after bundles are broken.

Page 41: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 1 DEMOLITION –01732

Page 2

3/26/2018

2. Store in a manner to prevent excessive rusting and fouling with dirt, grease, and other bond-breaking coatings.

PART 2 PRODUCTS [NOT USED]

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 METHOD OF REMOVAL

A. Culverts or Sewers: Pipe shall be removed by careful excavation of all dirt on top and the

sides in such manner that the pipe will not be damaged. Removal of sewer appurtenances shall be included for removal with the pipe. Those pipes which are deemed unsatisfactory for reuse by the Engineer may be removed in any manner the Contractor may select.

B. Concrete Structures:

1. Concrete structures or concrete portions of structures shall be removed by crushing and/or sledging the concrete into sizes not larger than one cubic foot.

2. Portions of the old structure shall be removed to the lines and dimensions shown

on the plans, and these materials shall be disposed of as shown on the plans or as directed by the Engineer. Any portion of the existing structure, outside of the limits designated for removal, damaged during the operations of the Contractor shall be restored to its original condition at his entire expense. Explosives shall not be used in the removal of portions of the existing structure unless approved by the Engineer, in writing.

3. Concrete portions of structures below the permanent ground line, which will not

interfere in any manner with the proposed construction, may be left in place, but removal shall be carried at least 2 feet below the permanent ground line and neatly squared off. Reinforcement shall be cut off close to the concrete.

C. Steel Structures: Steel structures or steel portions of structures shall be dismantled in sections as determined by the Engineer. The sections shall be stored. Rivets and bolts connecting steel railing members, steel beams of beam spans and steel stringers of truss spans shall be removed by butting the heads with a “cold cut” and punching or drilling from the hole, or by such other method as will not injure the members for re-use and will meet the approval of the Engineer. The removal of rivets and bolts from connections of truss members, bracing members, and other similar members in the structure will not be required unless specifically called for on the plans or special provisions and the Contractor shall have the option of dismantling these members by flame-cutting the members immediately adjacent to the connections. Flame-Cutting will not be permitted, however, when plans or special provisions call for the structure unit to be salvaged in such manner as to permit re-erection. In such case, all members shall be carefully matchmarked with paint in accordance with diagram furnished by the Engineer prior to dismantling, and all rivets and bolts shall be removed from the connections in the manner specified in the first portion of this paragraph.

D. Timber Structures:

1. Timber structures or timber portions of structures shall be removed in such manner as to damage the timber for further use as little as possible. All bolts and

Page 42: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 1 DEMOLITION –01732

Page 3

3/26/2018

nails shall be removed from such lumber as deemed salvable by the Engineer.

2. Unless otherwise specified on the plans, timber piles shall be either pulled or cut offal the point not less than 2 feet below ground line, with the choice between these two methods resting with the Contractor unless otherwise specified.

E. Brick or Stone Structures:

1. Brick or stone structures or stone portions of structures shall be removed by blasting and/or sledging the masonry into sizes not larger than one cubic foot. 2. Portions of such structures below the permanent ground line, which will not in any manner interfere with the proposed construction, may be left

in place, but removal shall be carried at least 2 feet below the permanent ground line and neatly squared off.

F. Salvage:

1. All material such as pipe, timbers, railings, etc., which the Engineer deems as salvageable for reuse, and all structural steel shall be in the property of City unless otherwise specified and delivered to a designated storage area.

2. All mechanical and electrical lift station material, which the Engineer deems as

salvageable for reuse, including pumps and control panels shall be in the property of the City unless otherwise specified and delivered to a designated storage area.

3. The I-beams, stringers, etc., which are specified to be dismantled without damage

for reuse, and all steel members when matchmarked and dismantled for reuse, shall be blocked off the ground in an upright position to protect the members against further damage.

4. Materials, other than structural steel, which are not deemed salvable by the

Engineer, shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be removed to suitable disposal sites oft’ of the right-of-way arranged for by the Contractor, or otherwise disposed of in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer.

5. Where temporary structures are necessary for a detour adjacent to the present

structure, the Contractor will be permitted to use the material in the old structure for the detour structure, but he shall dismantle and stack or dispose of the material as required above as soon as the new structure is opened for traffic.

I. Backfill:

1 All excavation made in connection with this specification and all openings below the natural ground line caused by the removal of old structures or portions thereof shall be backfilled to the level of the original ground line, unless otherwise provided on the plans.

2 That portion of the backfill which will support any portion of the roadbed or

embankment shall be placed in layers of the same depth as those required for placing embankment. Material in each layer shall be wetted uniformly, if

Page 43: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 1 DEMOLITION –01732

Page 4

3/26/2018

required, and shall be compacted to the density required in the adjoining embankment. In places inaccessible to blading and rolling equipment, mechanical or hand tamps or rammers shall be used to obtain the required compaction.

3 That portion of the backfill which will not support any portion of the roadbed or

embankment shall be placed as directed by the Engineer in such manner and to such state of compaction as will preclude

objectionable amount of settlement.

PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. No separate payment shall be made to the CONTRACTOR for the work described in this

Section. Such work shall be considered incidental to the project and the payments made under specific Pay Items shall be considered as full compensation for these requirements

END OF SECTION

Page 44: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION II SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION

Page 1

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. This section describes soil investigation at the site, and use of data resulting from that investigation.

1.2 SOILS INVESTIGATION REPORT

A. General 1. A detailed soils investigation, geotechnical report and recommendations are not

available for this site. 2. Bidders should visit the site and acquaint themselves with existing conditions. 3. Prior to bidding, bidders may make their own subsurface investigations to satisfy

themselves as to site and subsurface conditions, but such investigations may be performed only under time schedules and arrangements approved in advance by the Engineer.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. A construction soil engineer may be retained by the Owner to observe performance of work, including but not necessarily limited to, excavating, trenching, filling, backfilling, grading, and compaction tests.

B. Readjust work performed that does not meet technical or design requirements, but make no

deviation from the Contract Documents without specific and written approval from the Engineer.

PART 2 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

A. No separate payment shall be made to the CONTRACTOR for the work described in this Section. Such work shall be considered incidental to the project and the payments made under specific Pay Items shall be considered as full compensation for these requirements

END OF SECTION

Page 45: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

CLEARING – SECTION CLEARING PAGE 1

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. Clear and grub the site within the limits of construction as shown on the Drawings and specified in this Section.

B. Related work:

1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications.

2. Section 02220: Backfilling and compacting.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.

1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01620. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS

A. Provide materials, not specifically described but required for proper completion of the work of this Section, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Landscape Architect.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS

A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

3.2 PROTECTION

A. Protect existing utilities indicated or made known. B. Coordinate with utility providers prior to start of excavation.

C. Protect existing trees and shrubs, where indicated to remain, by providing a fence around

the tree or shrub as detailed in the plans so that the plants will not be damaged in any way as part of this Work.

D. Protection of persons and property:

Page 46: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

CLEARING – SECTION CLEARING PAGE 2

1. Barricade open depressions and holes occurring as part of this Work, and post

warning lights on property adjacent to or with public access. 2. Operate warning lights during hours from dusk to dawn each day and as otherwise

required. 3. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage

caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by operations under this Section.

E. Use means necessary to prevent dust becoming a nuisance to the public, to neighbors, and to

other work being performed on or near the site. F. Maintain access to the site at all times.

G. Where construction site is adjacent to a school install a continuous 6’-0” height construction

fence between the construction site and the school at the limits of construction as indicated on the plans.

3.3 CLEARING

A. The designated construction area shall be cleared of all trees, brush, shrubbery, and plants, not indicated on Drawings to be preserved. Trees and brush designated to be left in place shall be carefully trimmed as directed and shall be protected from scarring, barking or other injuries during construction operations. Pruned limbs over 2 inches in diameter shall be treated by painting the exposed ends with an approved asphaltic material. Stumps, roots, and other objectionable material shall be removed from areas requiring fill or from borrow sites and/or materials sources to the complete extent necessary to prevent objectionable matter from becoming mixed with the material to be used in construction.

B. Unless otherwise provided, all merchantable timber removed as previously specified shall

become the property of the Contractor. It is the intent of this specification to provide for the removal and disposal of all obstructions and objectionable materials not specifically provided for elsewhere by the Contract Documents.

C. Remove existing concrete and asphalt paving, curb, gutter, walks and other items shown or

described to be removed in the Contract Documents. D. Remove trees, shrubs and other plant life within the site shown or described to be removed in

the Contract Documents. Remove tree and shrub stumps and root system to a depth of 24 inches below existing grades. Remove grass and ground cover root system to a depth of 6 inches.

3.4 CONSERVATION OF TOPSOIL

A. In areas where excavation is required strip the existing topsoil to the depth necessary to provide at least 6" depth of topsoil in areas shown on the drawings to be planted.

B. Stockpile topsoil in an area clear of new construction.

C. Maintain the stockpile in a manner that will not obstruct the natural flow of drainage.

Page 47: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

CLEARING – SECTION CLEARING PAGE 3

1. Maintain stockpile free from debris and trash. 2. Keep the topsoil damp to prevent dust and drying out.

3.5 DISPOSAL

A. General: 1. Remove brush, grass, roots, trash, and other material from clearing operations. 2. Dispose of away from the site in a legal manner. 3. Do not store or permit debris to accumulate on the job site.

B. Do not burn debris at the site.

3.6 UTILITIES

A. Coordinate with utility companies and agencies as required. B. Where utility cutting, capping, or plugging is required, perform such work in accordance

with requirements of the utility company or governmental agency having jurisdiction. PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

A. No separate payment shall be made to the CONTRACTOR for the work described in this

Section. Such work shall be considered incidental to the project and the payments made under specific Pay Items shall be considered as full compensation for these requirements

END OF SECTION

Page 48: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

GRADING - SECTION 02210 - PAGE 1

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. In accordance with pertinent provisions of this Section, excavate, backfill, compact, and grade the site to the elevations shown on the Drawings and as needed to meet the requirements of the construction shown in the Contract Documents.

B. Related work: 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and

Supplementary conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. a. Section 02160 - Embankment. b. Section 02226 - Excavating, Backfilling and Compacting for

Pavement. c. Section 02223 - Structural Excavation d. Section 02950 - Trees, Plants and Ground Covers

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE:

A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.

B. Use equipment adequate in size, capacity, and numbers to accomplish the work in a timely

manner.

C. In addition to complying with requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, comply with the directions of the Landscape Architect.

1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01620. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SOIL MATERIALS

A. Fill and backfill materials: 1. Provide soil materials free from organic matter and deleterious substances,

containing no rocks or lumps over 3" in greatest dimension, and with not more than 15% of the rocks or lumps larger than 1-3/8" in their greatest dimension.

2. Fill material is subject to the approval of the Landscape Architect, and is that material removed from excavations or imported from off-site borrow areas, predominantly granular non-expansive soils, free from roots and other deleterious matter.

3. Do not permit rocks having a dimension greater than 1" in the upper 12" of fill or embankment.

Page 49: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

GRADING - SECTION 02210 - PAGE 2

4. Cohesionless material used for structural backfill: Provide sand free from organic

material and other foreign matter, and as approved by the Landscape Architect.

2.2 WEED KILLER

A. Provide a dry, free-flowing, dust-free chemical compound, soluble in water, capable of inhibiting growth of vegetation, and approved for use on this work by governmental agencies having jurisdiction.

2.3 TOPSOIL

A. Where and if shown on the Drawings or otherwise required, provide topsoil consisting of friable, fertile soil of loamy character, containing an amount of organic matter normal to the region, capable of sustaining healthy plant life, and reasonably free from subsoils, roots, heavy or stiff clay, stones larger than 1” in greatest dimension, noxious weeds, sticks, brush, litter, and other deleterious matter.

B. Obtain topsoil from sources within the project limits, or provide imported topsoil obtained

from sources outside the project limits, or from both sources. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS

A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

3.2 FINISH ELEVATIONS AND LINES

A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01050. 3.3 PROCEDURES

A. Utilities: 1. Unless shown to be removed, protect active utility lines shown on the Drawings or

otherwise made known to the Contractor prior to excavating. If damaged, repair or replace at no additional cost to the Owner.

2. If active utility lines are encountered, and are not shown on the Drawings or otherwise made known to the Contractor, promptly take necessary steps to assure that service is not interrupted.

3. If service is interrupted as a result of work under this Section, immediately restore service by repairing the damaged utility at no additional cost to the Owner.

4. If existing utilities are found to interfere with the permanent facilities being constructed under this Section, immediately notify the Landscape Architect and secure his instructions.

5. Do not proceed with permanent relocation of utilities until written instructions are received from the Landscape Architect.

Page 50: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

GRADING - SECTION 02210 - PAGE 3

B. Protection of persons and property:

1. Barricade open holes and depressions occurring as part of this Work, and post warning lights on property adjacent to or with public access.

2. Operate warning lights during hours from dusk to dawn each day and as otherwise required.

3. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, washout, and other hazards created by operations under this Section.

C. Dewatering:

1. Remove all water, including rainwater, encountered during trench and substructure work to an approved location by pumps, drains, and other approved methods.

2. Keep excavations and site construction area free from water.

D. Use means necessary to prevent dust becoming a nuisance to the public, to neighbors, and to other work being performed on or near the site.

E. Maintain access to adjacent areas at all times.

3.4 EXCAVATING

A. Perform excavating of every type of material encountered within the limits of the Work to the lines, grades, and elevations indicated and specified herein.

B. Satisfactory excavated materials:

1. Transport to, and place in, fill or embankment areas within the limits of the Work.

C. Unsatisfactory excavated materials: 1. Excavate to a distance below grade as directed by the Landscape Architect, and

replace with satisfactory materials. 2. Include excavation of unsatisfactory materials, and replacement by satisfactory

materials, as parts of the work of this Section.

D. Surplus Materials: 1. Dispose of unsatisfactory excavated materials, and surplus satisfactory excavated

materials, away from the site at disposal areas arranged and paid for by the Contractor.

E. Excavation of rock: 1. Where rocks, boulders, granite, or similar material is encountered, and where such

material cannot be removed or excavated by conventional earth moving or ripping equipment, take required steps to proceed with the general grading operations of the Work, and remove or excavate such material by means which will neither cause additional cost to the Owner nor endanger buildings or structures whether on or off the site.

2. Do not use explosives without written permission from the Landscape Architect.

F. Excavate and backfill in a manner and sequence that will provide proper drainage at all times.

Page 51: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

GRADING - SECTION 02210 - PAGE 4

G. Ditches and gutters:

1. Cut accurately to the cross sections, grades, and elevations shown. 2. Maintain excavations free from detrimental quantities of leaves, sticks, trash, and

other debris until completion of the work. 3. Dispose of excavated materials as shown on the Drawings or directed by the

Landscape Architect; except do not, in any case, deposit materials less than 3’-0" from the edge of a ditch.

H. Unauthorized excavation:

1. Unauthorized excavation consists of removal of material beyond indicated subgrade elevations or dimensions without specific instruction from the Landscape Architect.

2. Under footings, foundations, or retaining walls: a. Fill unauthorized excavation by extending the indicated bottom elevation of

the footing or base to the excavation bottom, without altering the required top elevation.

b. When acceptable to the Landscape Architect, lean concrete fill may be used to bring bottom elevations to proper position.

3. Elsewhere, backfill and compact unauthorized excavations as specified for authorized excavations, unless otherwise directed by the Landscape Architect.

I. Stability of excavations:

1. Slope sides of excavation to 1:3 or flatter, unless otherwise directed by the Landscape Architect.

2. Shore and brace where sloping is not possible because of space restrictions or stability of the materials being excavated.

3. Maintain sides and slopes of excavations in a safe condition until completion of backfilling.

J. Shoring and bracing:

1. Provide materials for shoring and bracing as may be necessary for safety of personnel, protection of work, and compliance with requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction.

2. Maintain shoring and bracing in excavations regardless of the time period excavations will be open.

3. Carry shoring and bracing down as excavation progresses. 3.5 FILLING AND BACKFILLING

A. Backfill excavations as promptly as progress of the Work permits, but not until: 1. Acceptance of construction below finish grade; 2. Inspecting, testing, approving, and recording locations of underground utilities; 3. Concrete formwork is removed; 4. Shoring and bracing are removed, and voids have been backfilled with

satisfactory materials; 5. Trash and debris have been removed; and 6. Horizontal bracing is in place on horizontally supported walls.

B. Ground surface preparation:

Page 52: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

GRADING - SECTION 02210 - PAGE 5

1. Remove vegetation, debris, unsatisfactory soil materials, obstructions, and

deleterious materials from the ground surface prior to placement of fills. 2. Plow, strip, or break up surfaces steeper than one vertical to four horizontal, so that

fill material will bond with existing surface. 3. When existing ground surface has a density less than that specified under

"compacting” for the particular area, break up the ground surface, pulverize, moisture-condition to the optimum moisture content, and compact to required depth and percentage of maximum density.

4. At exposed soils in areas to be paved, scarify to a minimum depth of 6", and recompact at a moisture content that will permit proper compaction as specified for fill.

C. Placing and compacting:

1. Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 6" in loose depth. 2. Before compacting, moisten or aerate each layer as necessary to provide the

optimum moisture content. 3. Compact each layer to required percentage of maximum density for the area. 4. Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or

containing frost or ice. 5. Place backfill and fill materials evenly adjacent to structures, to required elevations. 6. Take care to prevent wedging action of backfill against structures by carrying the

material uniformly around the structures to approximately the same elevation in each lift.

3.6 GRADING

A. General: 1. Uniformly grade the areas within limits of grading under this Section, including

adjacent transition areas. 2. Smooth the finished surfaces within specific tolerance. 3. Compact with uniform levels or slopes between points where elevations are shown

on the Drawings, or between such points and existing grades. 4. Where a change of slope is indicated on the Drawings, construct a rolled transition

section having a minimum radius of approximately 8’-0", unless adjacent construction will not permit such a transition, or if such a transition defeats positive control of drainage.

B. Grading outside building lines:

1. Grade areas adjacent to buildings to achieve drainage away from the structures, and to prevent ponding.

2. Finish the surfaces to be free from irregular surface changes, and: a. Shape the surface of areas scheduled to be under walks to line, grade, and

cross-section, with finished surface not more than 0.10 ft above or below the required subgrade elevation.

b. Shape the surface of areas scheduled to be under pavement to line, grade, and cross-section, with finished surface not more than 0.05 ft above or below the required subgrade elevation.

3.7 COMPACTING

Page 53: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

GRADING - SECTION 02210 - PAGE 6

A. Control soil compaction during construction to provide the minimum percentage of density

specified for each area as determined according to THD test method TEX- 113E.

B. Provide not less than the following maximum density of soil material compacted at optimum moisture content for the actual density of each layer of soil material in place, and as approved by the Landscape Architect. 1. Structures:

a. Compact the top 12" of subgrade, in 6” lifts, and each 6” layer of fill material or backfill material at 95% of maximum density.

2. Lawn and unpaved areas: a. Compact the top 12" of subgrade and each layer of fill material or backfill

material at 90% of maximum density. b. Compact the upper 12" of filled areas, or natural soil exposed by

excavating, at 85% of maximum density.

3. Walks: a. Compact the top 12” of subgrade, in 6” lifts, and each 6” layer of fill

material or backfill material at 95% of maximum density. 4. Pavements:

a. Compact the top 12" of subgrade, in 6” lifts, and each 6” layer of fill material or backfill material at 95% of maximum density.

C. Moisture control:

1. Where subgrade or layer of soil material must be moisture-conditioned before compacting, uniformly apply water to surface of subgrade or layer of soil material to prevent free water appearing on surface during or subsequent compacting operations.

2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, soil material that is too wet to permit compacting to the specified density.

3. Soil material that has been removed because it is too wet to permit compacting may be stockpiled or spread and allowed to dry. Assist drying by discing, harrowing, or pulverizing until moisture content is reduced to a satisfactory value as determined by moisture-density relation tests approved by the Landscape Architect.

3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Secure the Landscape Architect’s inspection and approval of subgrades and fill layers before subsequent construction is permitted thereon.

B. Provide at least the following tests to the approval of the owner:

1. At paved areas, at least one field density test for 5000 to 10,000 sq. ft of paved area, but not less then three tests;

2. In each compacted fill layer, one field density test 5000 to 10,000 sq. ft of overlaying paved area, but not less then three tests.

C. If tests show the density to be more than 2 percent below the specified minimum, or the

moisture content to be more than 3 percent above or below the optimum, provide additional compacting and testing under the provisions of Section 01410 of these Specifications.

3.9 MAINTENANCE

Page 54: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

GRADING - SECTION 02210 - PAGE 7

A. Protection of newly graded areas: 1. Protect newly graded areas from traffic and erosion, and keep free from trash

and weeds; 2. Repair and reestablish grades in settled, eroded, and rutted areas to the specified

tolerances.

B. Where completed compacted areas are disturbed by subsequent construction operations or adverse weather, scarify the surface, reshape, and compact to the required density prior to further construction.

PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

A. No separate payment shall be made to the CONTRACTOR for the work described in this Section. Payments made under the lump sum shall be considered as full compensation for these requirements

END OF SECTION

Page 55: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

CONCRETE REMOVAL - SECTION 02212 PAGE 1

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION:

A. The work covered by this section shall consist of breaking up, removing and satisfactorily disposing of existing concrete located within the project area or as directed by the Owner, Landscape Architect or Engineer. Existing concrete not shown on the plans, located beneath the natural ground surface, not indicated by the Owner, Landscape Architect or Engineer or not obvious to the naked eye, but in conflict with the proposed structures, shall be covered under this item. Such materials will be removed, as needed.

1.2 CLASSIFICATION:

A. Existing concrete to be removed under this item will be classified as follows: 1. Sidewalks, Curbs, Drives, Retaining Walls and Misc. Footings

PART 2 - PRODUCTS - Not Applicable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONSTRUCTION METHODS:

A. The existing concrete shall be broken up, removed, and disposed of by the Contractor. B. When only a portion of the existing concrete is to be removed, care shall be exercised to

avoid damage to that portion to remain in place. The existing concrete shall be cut to neat lines shown on the plans or as established by the Engineer, by sawing with an appropriate type circular concrete saw to a minimum depth of one-half (1/2) inch. Any existing concrete, which is damaged or destroyed beyond the neat lines so established, shall be replaced at the Contractor’s expense.

C. Where reinforcement is encountered in the removed portions of the concrete, a minimum of

one (1) foot shall be cleaned of all old concrete and left in place to tie into the new concrete construction.

PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

A. No separate payment shall be made to the CONTRACTOR for the work described in this Section. Such work shall be considered incidental to the project and the payments made under lump sum shall be considered as full compensation for these requirements

END OF SECTION

Page 56: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 2 EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING FOR SITE - 02220

Page 1

3/26/2018

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. Excavate, backfill, compact, and grade the site to the elevations shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as needed to meet the requirements of the construction shown in the Contract Documents.

B. Related work:

1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications. a. Section 02110: Grading. b. Section 02160: Embankment. c. Section 02223:Structural Excavation d. Section 02950: Trees, Plants and Ground Covers

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.

B. Use equipment adequate in size, capacity, and numbers to accomplish the work of this

Section in a timely manner.

C. In addition to complying with requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, comply with the directions of the Landscape Architect.

1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01620. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SOIL MATERIALS

A. Fill and backfill materials: 1. Provide soil materials free from organic matter and deleterious substances,

containing no rocks or lumps over 6" in greatest dimension, and with not more than 15% of the rocks or lumps larger than 2" in their greatest dimension.

2. Fill material is subject to the approval of the Landscape Architect, and is that material removed from excavations or imported from off-site borrow areas, predominantly granular, non-expansive soils free from roots and other deleterious matter.

3. Do not permit rocks having a dimension greater than 1" in the upper 12" of fill or embankment.

Page 57: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 2 EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING FOR SITE - 02220

Page 2

3/26/2018

4. Cohesionless material used for structural backfill: Provide sand free from organic material and other foreign matter, and as approved by the Landscape Architect.

5. Where granular base is called for under building slabs, provide aggregate complying with requirements of Section 03301 of these Specifications.

2.2 WEED KILLER

A. Provide a dry, free-flowing, dust-free chemical compound, soluble in water, capable of inhibiting growth of vegetation, and approved for use on this Work by governmental agencies having jurisdiction.

2.3 TOPSOIL

A. Where and if shown on the Drawings or otherwise required, provide topsoil consisting of friable, fertile soil of loamy character, containing an amount of organic matter normal to the region, capable of sustaining healthy plant life, and reasonably free from subsoil, roots, heavy or stiff clay, stones larger than 1/2" in greatest dimension, noxious weeds, sticks, brush, litter, and other deleterious matter.

B. Obtain topsoil from sources within the project limits, or provide imported topsoil obtained

from sources outside the project limits, or from both sources. 2.4 OTHER MATERIALS

A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Landscape Architect.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS

A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

3.2 FINISH ELEVATIONS AND LINES

A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01050.

3.3 PROCEDURES

A. Utilities: 1. Unless shown to be removed, protect active utility lines shown on the Drawings or

otherwise made known to the Contractor prior to excavating. If damaged, repair or replace at no additional cost to the Owner.

2. If active utility lines are encountered, and are not shown on the Drawings or otherwise made known to the Contractor, promptly take necessary steps to assure that service is not interrupted.

Page 58: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 2 EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING FOR SITE - 02220

Page 3

3/26/2018

3. If service is interrupted as a result of work under this Section, immediately restore service by repairing the damaged utility at no additional cost to the Owner.

4. If existing utilities are found to interfere with the permanent facilities being constructed under this Section, immediately notify the Landscape Architect and secure his instructions.

5. Do not proceed with permanent relocation of utilities until written instructions are received from the Landscape Architect.

B. Protection of persons and property:

1. Barricade open holes and depressions occurring as part of the Work, and post warning lights on property adjacent to or with public access.

2. Operate warning lights during hours from dusk to dawn each day and as otherwise required.

3. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, washout, and other hazards created by operations under this Section.

C. Dewatering:

1. Remove all water, including rainwater, encountered during trench and sub-structure work to an approved location by pumps, drains, and other approved methods.

2. Keep excavations and site construction area free from water.

D. Use means necessary to prevent dust becoming a nuisance to the public, to neighbors, and to other work being performed on or near the site.

E. Maintain access to adjacent areas at all times.

3.4 EXCAVATING

A. Perform excavating of every type of material encountered within the limits or the Work to the lines, grades, and elevations indicated and specified herein.

B. Satisfactory excavated materials:

1. Transport to, and place in, fill or embankment areas within the limits of the Work.

C. Unsatisfactory excavated materials: 1. Excavate to a distance below grade as directed by the Landscape Architect, and

replace with satisfactory materials. 2. Include excavation of unsatisfactory materials, and replacement by satisfactory

materials, as parts of the work of this Section.

D. Surplus materials: 1. Dispose of unsatisfactory excavated material, and surplus satisfactory excavated

material, away from the site at disposal areas arranged and paid for by the Contractor.

E. Excavation of rock:

1. Where rocks, boulders, granite, or similar material is encountered, and where such material cannot be removed or excavated by conventional earth moving or ripping equipment, take required steps to proceed with the general grading operations of the

Page 59: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 2 EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING FOR SITE - 02220

Page 4

3/26/2018

Work, and remove or excavate such material by means which will neither cause additional cost to the Owner nor endanger buildings or structures whether on or off the site.

2. Do not use explosives without written permission from the Landscape Architect.

F. Excavate and backfill in a manner and sequence that will provide proper drainage at all times.

G. Borrow:

1. Obtain material required for fill or embankment in excess of that produced within the grading limits of the Work from borrow areas selected and paid for by the Contractor and approved by the Landscape Architect.

H. Ditches and gutters:

1. Cut accurately to the cross sections, grades, and elevations shown. 2. Maintain excavations free from detrimental quantities of leaves, sticks, trash, and

other debris until completion of the Work. 3. Dispose of excavated materials as shown on the Drawings or directed by the

Landscape Architect; except do not, in any case, deposit materials less than 3'-0" from the edge of a ditch.

I. Unauthorized excavation:

1. Unauthorized excavation consists of removal of materials beyond indicated subgrade elevations or dimensions without specific instruction from the Landscape Architect.

2. Under footings, foundations, or retaining walls: a. Fill unauthorized excavations by extending the indicated bottom elevation

of the footing or base to the excavation bottom, without altering the required top elevation.

b. When acceptable to the Landscape Architect, lean concrete fill may be used to bring the bottom elevation to proper position.

3. Elsewhere, backfill and compact unauthorized excavations as specified for authorized excavations, unless otherwise directed by the Landscape Architect.

J. Stability of excavations:

1. Slope sides of excavations to 1:3 or flatter, unless otherwise directed by the Landscape Architect.

2. Shore and brace where sloping is not possible because of space restrictions or stability of the materials being excavated.

3. Maintain sides and slopes of excavations in a safe condition until completion of backfilling.

K. Shoring and bracing:

1. Provide materials for shoring and bracing as may be necessary for safety of personnel, protection of work, and compliance with requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction.

2. Maintain shoring and bracing in excavations regardless of the time period excavations will be open.

3. Carry shoring and bracing down as excavation progresses.

Page 60: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 2 EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING FOR SITE - 02220

Page 5

3/26/2018

L. Excavating for structures: 1. Conform to elevations and dimensions shown within a tolerance of 0.10 ft, and

extending a sufficient distance from footings and foundations to permit placing and moving concrete form work, installation of services, other construction required, and for inspection.

2. In excavating for footings and foundations, take care not to disturb bottom of excavation: a. Excavate by hand tools to final grade just before concrete is placed. b. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive

concrete. 3. Excavate for footings and foundations only after general site excavating, filling, and

grading are complete.

M. Excavating for pavements: 1. Cut surface under pavements to comply with cross sections, elevations, and grades.

N. Cold weather protection: 1. Protect excavation bottoms against freezing when atmospheric temperature is less

than 35 degrees F.

3.5 FILLING AND BACKFILLING

A. General: 1. For each classification listed below, place acceptable soil material in layers to

required subgrade elevations. 2. In excavations:

a. Use satisfactory excavated or borrowed materials. 3. Under asphalt pavements:

a. Use subbase materials. 4. Under building slabs:

a. Use granular fill, if so called for on the Drawings, complying with aggregate acceptable under Section 03301 of these Specifications.

B. Backfill excavations as promptly as progress of the work permit, but not until completion of

the following. 1. Acceptance of construction below finish grade including, where applicable, damp

proofing and waterproofing. 2. Inspecting, testing, approving, and recording locations of underground utilities. 3. Removing concrete formwork. 4. Removing shoring and bracing, and backfilling of voids with satisfactory materials. 5. Removing trash and debris. 6. Placement of horizontal bracing on horizontally supported walls.

C. Ground surface preparation: 1. Remove vegetation, debris, unsatisfactory soil materials, obstructions, and

deleterious matter from ground surface prior to placement of fills. 2. Plow, strip, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than one vertical to four horizontal

so that fill material will bond with existing surface. 3. When existing ground surface has a density less than that specified under

"compacting” for the particular area, break up the ground surface, pulverize,

Page 61: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 2 EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING FOR SITE - 02220

Page 6

3/26/2018

moisture-condition to the optimum moisture content, and compact to required depth and percentage of maximum density.

D. Placing and compacting:

1. Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 6" in loose depth. 2. Before compacting, moisten or aerate each layer as necessary to provide the

optimum moisture content. 3. Compact each layer to required percentage of maximum density for area. 4. Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or

containing frost or ice. 5. Place backfill and fill materials evenly adjacent to structures, to required elevations. 6. Take care to prevent wedging action of backfill against structures by carrying the

material uniformly around the structure to approximately the same elevation in each lift.

7. Where the construction includes basement or other underground walls having structural floors over them, do not backfill such walls until the structural floors are in place and have attained sufficient strength to support he walls.

3.6 GRADING

A. General: 1. Uniformly grade the areas within limits of grading under this Section, including

adjacent transition areas. 2. Smooth the finished surfaces within specified tolerance. 3. Compact with uniform levels or slopes between points where elevations are shown

on the Drawings, or between such points and existing grades. 4. Where a change of slope is indicated on the Drawings, construct a rolled transition

section having a minimum radius of approximately 8’-0", unless adjacent construction will not permit such a transition, or if such a transition defeats positive control of drainage.

B. Grading outside building lines:

1. Grade areas adjacent to buildings to achieve drainage away from the structures, and to prevent ponding.

2. Finish the surfaces to be free from irregular surface changes, and: a. Shape the surface of areas scheduled. To be under walks to line, grade, and

cross-section, with finished surface not more than 0.10 ft above or below the required subgrade elevation.

b. Shape the surface of areas scheduled to be under pavement to line, grade, and cross-section, with finished surface not more than .05 ft above or below the required subgrade elevation.

3.7 COMPACTING

A. Control soil compaction during construction to provide the minimum percentage of density specified for each area as determined according to THD test method TEX-13E.

B. Provide not less than the following maximum density of soil material compacted at

optimum moisture content for the actual density of each layer of soil material in place, and as approved by the Landscape Architect.

Page 62: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 2 EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING FOR SITE - 02220

Page 7

3/26/2018

1. Structures: a. Compact the top 12" of subgrade, in 6” lifts, and each 6” layer of fill

material or backfill material at 95% of maximum density. 2. Lawn and unpaved areas:

a. Compact the top 12" of subgrade and each layer of fill material or backfill material at 90% of maximum density.

b. Compact the upper 12" of filled areas, or natural soil exposed by excavating, at 85% of maximum density.

3. Walks: a. Compact the top 12” of subgrade, in 6” lifts, and each 6” layer of fill

material or backfill material at 95% of maximum density. 4. Pavements:

a. Compact the top 12" of subgrade, in 6” lifts, and each 6” layer of fill material or backfill material at 95% of maximum density.

C. Moisture control:

1. Where subgrade or layer of soil material must be moisture-conditioned before compacting, uniformly apply water to surface of subgrade or layer of soil material to prevent free water appearing on surface during or subsequent to compacting operations.

2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, soil material that is too wet to permit compacting to the specified density.

3. Soil material that has been removed because it is too wet to permit compacting may be stockpiled or spread and allowed to dry. Assist drying by discing, harrowing, or pulverizing until moisture content is reduced to a satisfactory value as determined by moisture-density relation tests approved by the Landscape Architect.

3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Secure the Landscape Architect's inspection and approval of sub grades and fill layers before subsequent construction is permitted thereon.

B. Provide at least the following tests to the approval of the Landscape Architect:

1. At paved areas, at least one field density test for 5,000 to 10,000 sq. ft of paved area, but not less than three tests;

2. In each compacted fill layer, one field density test 5,000 to 10,000 sq. ft of overlaying paved area, but not less than three tests.

C. If tests show the density to be more than 2 percent below the specified minimum or the

moisture content to be more than 3 percent above or below the optimum, provide additional compacting and testing under the provisions of Section 01410 of these Specifications.

3.9 MAINTENANCE

A. Protection of newly graded areas: 1. Protect newly graded areas from traffic and erosion and keep free from trash and

weeds; rutted areas to the specified tolerances. 2. Repair and reestablish grades in settled, eroded, and rutted areas to the specified

tolerances.

Page 63: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 2 EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING FOR SITE - 02220

Page 8

3/26/2018

B. Where completed compacted areas are disturbed by subsequent construction operations or adverse weather, scarify the surface, reshape, and compact to the required density prior to further construction.

PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

A. No separate payment shall be made to the CONTRACTOR for the work described in this Section. Payments made under the lump sum shall be considered as full compensation for these requirements

END OF SECTION

Page 64: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 2 EXCAVATION, BACKFILL AND COMPACTION FOR PAVEMENT - 02226

Page 1

3/26/2018

SECTION 02226 - EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING FOR PAVEMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. Excavating, backfilling and compacting for establishing pavement subgrade elevations. B. C. Related work:

1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications. a. Section 02210 - Grading. b. Section 02260 - Embankment. c. Section 02223 - Structural Excavation d. Section 02520 Concrete Pavement e. Section o3301 - Concrete

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.

B. Use equipment adequate in size, capacity, and numbers to accomplish the work of this

Section in a timely manner.

C. In addition to complying with requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, comply with the directions of the Landscape Architect.

D. Comply with:

1. ASTM D4318 - Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit and Plasticity Index of Soils. 2. ASTM D698 - Moisture-Density Relations of Soils (Standard).

1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01620. 1.6 DEFINITIONS

A. Classification: Earthwork materials are classified in accordance with definitions in this Article.

B. Topsoil: Top 6 inches of natural surface soil possessing the characteristics of

representative soils on the site that produce growths of grass or other vegetation. Topsoil includes roots and other vegetation.

C. Pavement Select Fill: Select fill material excavated on site or suitable borrow material

consisting of inorganic sandy clay meeting specified requirements.

Page 65: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 2 EXCAVATION, BACKFILL AND COMPACTION FOR PAVEMENT - 02226

Page 2

3/26/2018

D. Natural Subgrade: Consists of that portion of the surface on which a compacted embankment or pavement is constructed, after removal of 6-inch topsoil layer, as described in Section 02210.

E. Compacted Embankment: A subgrade under pavement consisting of fill placed and

compacted between the top of compacted natural subgrade and underside of pavement and including fill areas adjacent to paving within limits shown on Typical Cross Sections.

F. Borrow: Strata I and Strata II clays from ATP building area to be used to raise grade

outside building area. G. Finish Grading: Operations required for smoothing disturbed areas that are not overlaid

with pavement. H. Excavation: Excavation of every description and of whatever substances encountered

within the grading limits of the project to the lines and grades indicated on the Drawings. I. Compaction: Compaction of subgrade soil materials, shall be measured as a percent of

Standard Proctor Density at the specified moisture content as determined by ASTM D698

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS

A. Fill Under Pavement 1. Inorganic sandy clay. 2. Optimal plasticity index between 7 and 20. 3. Optimal liquid limit of 35 or less. 4. No rock or pieces larger than 3 inches greatest dimension.

B. All fill soils shall be free of organic material and debris. A quality control program shall

be established by the Contractor to check that zones of unsuitable soils are not allowed in the paving areas.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 HANDLING OF TOPSOIL

A. Remove top 6 inches of topsoil within limits of the paving section, and area adjacent to paving section as required, and stockpile on the Owners property in an approved location. Protect stockpiles of topsoil from other excavated materials, dumping of unwanted material and dumping by the public.

3.2 STRIPPING OF GROUND SURFACE

A. All vegetation, all decayed vegetable matter, rubbish and other unsuitable material within the areas to be graded, not removed by clearing, shall be stripped or otherwise removed to 18 inches below ground level before grading or other earthwork is started. In no case will such material be allowed to remain in or on the areas to be graded.

Page 66: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 2 EXCAVATION, BACKFILL AND COMPACTION FOR PAVEMENT - 02226

Page 3

3/26/2018

3.3 EXCAVATION

A. Objective: As shown on the Drawings, excavate to lines, grades and elevations required for subsequent construction of embankments, flexible base, or pavement. Remove materials within the indicated limits and dispose as directed.

B. Drainage: During excavation, maintain grades for complete drainage. When directed,

install temporary drains or drainage ditches to intercept or divert surface water and prevent interference or delay of the work.

C. Stockpiling: If at time of excavation it is not possible to place material in the proper

section of permanent construction, stockpile the material in approved areas for later use. D. Stone or Rock: Stones or rock fragments larger than 1-inches in their greatest dimension

will not be permitted in top 6 inches of subgrade. E. Dressing: Uniformly dress, cut and fill slopes to slope, cross section and alignment, as

shown. 3.4 NATURAL SUBGRADE UNDER PAVEMENTS

A. Remove existing earth as required for placement of pavement section as indicated on the Drawings. Proof roll excavated surface with a 20 ton or larger roller to identify soft or undesirable material and remove such soft or undesirable material to suitable material beneath. Break down sides of holes or depressions to flatten the slopes.

B. Fill any such hole or depression with appropriate soil with similar classification, moisture

content, and density as adjacent soils. C. Grade adjustments within pavement construction limits shall be accomplished with

pavement select fill, placed in maximum 8-inch lifts moistened and compacted as specified in this Section.

D. After depressions have been filled, grade adjustments made, and immediately before

placement of pavement section, thoroughly loosen the foundation material to a depth of 8 inches. Remove roots and debris turned up while loosening the soil. Adjust moisture and re-compact the subgrade as specified in this Section.

3.5 PLACING EMBANKMENT FILL FOR GRADE ADJUSTMENTS

A. Inspection of Natural Subgrade: Proof roll excavated surface with a 20 ton or larger roller

to identify soft or undesirable material and remove such soft or undesirable material to suitable material beneath. Any soft or compressible areas detected during the re-compaction process shall be undercut such that sound subgrade soils are exposed and re-compacted. Do not place select fill for grade adjustments to the natural subgrade until the surface has been approved.

B. Prior to placing pavement fill, scarify the natural subgrade to a depth of 6 inches. As

needed, adjust the moisture content to between optimum and plus 4 percent. Re-compact to the subgrade to a dry density between 95% of the maximum Standard Proctor Density, as determined by ASTM D698.

Page 67: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 2 EXCAVATION, BACKFILL AND COMPACTION FOR PAVEMENT - 02226

Page 4

3/26/2018

C. Removing Debris: During the dumping and spreading process, remove all roots, stones,

and debris that are uncovered in the select material. D. Spreading Fill: After dumping, spread the pavement select fill in horizontal layers over

the entire fill area. The thickness of each layer before compaction shall not exceed 8-inches and compact to the moisture/density values specified above. Place fill adjacent to pavement sections to elevations indicated.

E. Attaining Proper Bond: If the compacted surface of a layer is too smooth to bond with

succeeding layers, loosen the surface by harrowing or other approved method before continuing the work.

3.6 MOISTURE CONTROL

A. Intent: Developing the maximum density obtainable with the natural moisture of the

material is preferred. However, the moisture content of the pavement base material shall not vary from -2 percent optimum, as determined by ASTM D698, by more than plus 3 percent of optimum. The moisture content of the natural subgrade under pavement sections, including grade adjustments with pavement select fill, as determined by ASTM D698 shall be maintained between optimum and plus 4 percent of optimum.

B. Adjustment: If the moisture content is too high, adjust to within the specified limits by

spreading the material and permitting it to dry. Assist the drying process by disking or harrowing if necessary. When the material is too dry, sprinkle each layer with water. Work the moisture into the soil by harrowing or other approved method.

3.7 COMPACTION

A. Compact each layer of pavement select fill with suitable rollers as necessary to obtain a

dry density of 95% maximum dry density within the specified range of the moisture content, according to ASTM D698.

3.8 MATERIAL DISPOSAL

A. Excess Excavated Material (soil material free of trees, stumps, logs, brush, roots, rubbish

and other objectionable matter which has been approved) shall be removed from the construction site before Pre-final Inspection. Approved excess material shall be deposited on the Owner's property in an approved location.

B. Waste Material (soil material including trees, stumps, logs, brush, roots, rubbish and

other objectionable matter which has not been approved) shall be removed from the project site before Pre-final Inspection. Legally dispose of material at a licensed site or with written and notarized permission from the property owner for a private disposal site. All costs associated with waste material removal and disposal shall be paid for by the Contractor.

3.9 TESTING

A. Laboratory Testing and Inspection Services: As specified in specification Section 01460.

Page 68: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 2 EXCAVATION, BACKFILL AND COMPACTION FOR PAVEMENT - 02226

Page 5

3/26/2018

1.5 EXISTING UTILITIES

A. Where pipes, ducts and structures are encountered in the excavation but are not shown on the Drawings, immediately notify the LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT.

PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

A. No separate payment shall be made to the CONTRACTOR for the work described in this Section. Payments made under the lump sum shall be considered as full compensation for these requirements

END OF SECTION

Page 69: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 2 TREE PROTECTION AND TRIMMING - 02231

Page 1

03/26/2018

SECTION 02231 - TREE PROTECTION AND TRIMMING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1. Section 02210: Grading. 2. Section 02220: Excavating, Backfilling and Compacting for Site. 3. Section 02223:Structural Excavation 4. Section 02950: Trees, Plants and Ground Covers 5. Section 01010: Summary of Work

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the protection and trimming of existing trees that interfere with, or are affected by, execution of the Work, whether temporary or permanent construction.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Tree Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees or groups of trees to remain during construction, and defined by the drip line of individual trees or the perimeter drip line of groups of trees, unless otherwise indicated.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Tree Pruning Schedule: Written schedule from certified arborist detailing scope and extent of pruning of trees to remain that interfere with or are affected by construction.

C. Qualification Data: For tree service firm and certified arborist.

D. Certification: From arborist, certifying that trees indicated to remain have been protected during construction according to recognized standards and that trees were promptly and properly treated and repaired when damaged.

E. Maintenance Recommendations: From arborist, for care and protection of trees affected by construction during and after completing the Work.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Tree Service Firm Qualifications: An experienced tree service firm that has successfully completed tree protection and trimming work similar to that required for this Project and that will assign an experienced, qualified arborist to Project site during execution of tree protection and trimming.

B. Arborist Qualifications: An arborist certified by ISA or licensed in the jurisdiction where Project is located.

Page 70: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 2 TREE PROTECTION AND TRIMMING - 02231

Page 2

03/26/2018

C. Tree Pruning Standard: Comply with ANSI A300 (Part 1), "Tree, Shrub, and Other Woody Plant Maintenance--Standard Practices (Pruning)."

D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." 1. Before tree protection and trimming operations begin, meet with representatives

of authorities having jurisdiction, Owner, Landscape Architect, consultants, and other concerned entities to review tree protection and trimming procedures and responsibilities.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Drainage Fill: Selected crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel, washed, ASTM D 448, Size 24, with 90 to 100 percent passing a 2-1/2-inch sieve and not more than 10 percent passing a 3/4-inch sieve.

B. Topsoil: Natural or cultivated surface-soil layer containing organic matter and sand, silt, and clay particles; friable, pervious, and black or a darker shade of brown, gray, or red than underlying subsoil; reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, gravel, and other objects more than 2 inches in diameter; and free of weeds, roots, and toxic and other nonsoil materials. 1. Obtain topsoil only from well-drained sites where topsoil is 4 inches deep or

more; do not obtain from bogs or marshes.

C. Filter Fabric: Manufacturer’s standard, nonwoven, pervious, geotextile fabric of polypropylene, nylon, or polyester fibers.

D. Chain-Link Fence: Metallic-coated steel chain-link fence fabric of 0.120-inchdiameter wire; a minimum of 48 inches high; with 1.9-inch- diameter line posts; 2-3/8-inch- diameter terminal and corner posts; 1-5/8-inch- diameter top rail; and 0.177-inch- diameter bottom tension wire; with tie wires, hog ring ties, and other accessories for a complete fence system.

E. Orange Plastic Fence.

F. Organic Mulch: Shredded hardwood, free of deleterious materials.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Temporary Fencing: Install temporary fencing around tree protection zones to protect remaining trees and vegetation from construction damage. Maintain temporary fence and remove when construction is complete. 1. Install chain-link fence or orange plastic fencing according to ASTM F 567 and

manufacturer's written instructions.

Page 71: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 2 TREE PROTECTION AND TRIMMING - 02231

Page 3

03/26/2018

B. Protect tree root systems from damage caused by runoff or spillage of noxious materials while mixing, placing, or storing construction materials. Protect root systems from ponding, eroding, or excessive wetting caused by dewatering operations.

C. Mulch areas [inside tree protection zones and within drip line of trees to remain and other areas indicated. 1. Apply 4-inch average thickness of organic mulch. Do not place mulch within 6

inches of tree trunks.

D. Do not store construction materials, debris, or excavated material inside tree protection zones. Do not permit vehicles or foot traffic within tree protection zones; prevent soil compaction over root systems.

E. Maintain tree protection zones free of weeds and trash.

F. Do not allow fires within tree protection zones.

3.2 EXCAVATION

A. Install shoring or other protective support systems to minimize sloping or benching of excavations.

B. Do not excavate within tree protection zones, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Where excavation for new construction is required within tree protection zones, hand clear and excavate to minimize damage to root systems. Use narrow-tine spading forks and comb soil to expose roots. 1. Redirect roots in backfill areas where possible. If encountering large, main

lateral roots, expose roots beyond excavation limits as required to bend and redirect them without breaking. If encountered immediately adjacent to location of new construction and redirection is not practical, cut roots approximately 3 inches back from new construction.

2. Do not allow exposed roots to dry out before placing permanent backfill. Provide temporary earth cover or pack with peat moss and wrap with burlap. Water and maintain in a moist condition. Temporarily support and protect roots from damage until they are permanently relocated and covered with soil.

D. Where utility trenches are required within tree protection zones, tunnel under or around roots by drilling, auger boring, pipe jacking, or digging by hand.

1. Root Pruning: Do not cut main lateral roots or taproots; cut only smaller roots that interfere with installation of utilities. Cut roots with sharp pruning instruments; do not break or chop.

3.3 REGRADING

A. Grade Lowering: Where new finish grade is indicated below existing grade around trees, slope grade away from trees as recommended by arborist, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Root Pruning: Prune tree roots exposed during grade lowering. Do not cut main

lateral roots or taproots; cut only smaller roots. Cut roots with sharp pruning instruments; do not break or chop.

Page 72: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 2 TREE PROTECTION AND TRIMMING - 02231

Page 4

03/26/2018

B. Minor Fill: Where existing grade is 6 inches or less below elevation of finish grade, fill with topsoil. Place topsoil in a single uncompacted layer and hand grade to required finish elevations.

C. Moderate Fill: Where existing grade is more than 6 inches but less than 12 below elevation of finish grade, place drainage fill, filter fabric, and topsoil on existing grade as follows: 1. Carefully place drainage fill against tree trunk approximately 2 inches above

elevation of finish grade and extend not less than 18 inches from tree trunk on all sides. For balance of area within drip-line perimeter, place drainage fill up to 6 inches below elevation of grade.

2. Place filter fabric with edges overlapping 6 inches minimum. 3. Place fill layer of topsoil to finish grade. Do not compact drainage fill or topsoil.

Hand grade to required finish elevations.

3.4 TREE PRUNING

A. Prune trees to remain that are affected by temporary and permanent construction.

B. Provide subsequent maintenance during Contract period as recommended by arborist.

C. Pruning Standards: Prune trees according to ANSI A300 1. Type of Pruning: Cleaning Raising 2. Specialty Pruning: Restoration Palm.

D. Cut branches with sharp pruning instruments; do not break or chop.

E. Chip removed tree branches and spread over areas identified by Landscape Architect

3.5 TREE REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT

A. Promptly repair trees damaged by construction operations within 24 hours. Treat damaged trunks, limbs, and roots according to arborist's written instructions.

B. Remove and replace trees indicated to remain that die or are damaged during construction operations that Landscape Architect determines are incapable of restoring to normal growth pattern. 1. Provide new trees of 6-inch caliper size and of a species selected by Architect

when damaged trees more than 6 inches in caliper size, measured 12 above grade, are required to be replaced. Plant and maintain new trees as specified in Section 02950: Trees, Plants and Groundcover.

C. Aerate surface soil, compacted during construction, 10 feet beyond drip line and no closer than 36 inches to tree trunk. Drill 2-inch- diameter holes a minimum of 12 inches deep at 24 inches o.c. Backfill holes with an equal mix of augered soil and sand.

3.6 DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIALS

A. Burning is not permitted.

B. Disposal: Remove excess excavated material and displaced trees from Owner's property.

Page 73: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 2 TREE PROTECTION AND TRIMMING - 02231

Page 5

03/26/2018

PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

A. No separate payment shall be made to the CONTRACTOR for the work described in this Section. Such work shall be considered incidental to the project and the payments made under lump sum shall be considered as full compensation for these requirements

END OF SECTION

Page 74: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

IRRIGATION 328400-Page 1

SECTION 328400 – IRRIGATION PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Provide an underground irrigation system as shown and specified. The work includes:

1. Automatic irrigation system including piping, fittings, sprinkler heads, controller, and accessories.

2. Valves, backflow preventer, and fittings.

3 Testing.

4. Excavating and backfilling irrigation system work.

5. Associated exterior plumbing, and accessories to complete the system

6. Pipe sleeves.

B. Related Work:

1. Landscape Work

2. Protection of Landscape

3. Division 16 – Electrical 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer’s qualifications: Minimum of 3 years experience installing irrigation systems of comparable size. Contrac-tor shall be a licensed and bonded Irrigator.

B. Materials, equipment, and methods of installation shall comply with the following codes and standards:

1. Texas Commission On Environmental Quality (TCEQ) Chapter 34, Texas Water Code; Chapter 344 Rules

for Irrigators.

2. National Fire Protection Association, (NFPA): National Electrical Code.

3. American Society for Testing and Materials, (ASTM).

4. National Sanitation Foundation, (NSF).

5. City of San Antonio Applicable Plumbing Code 6. City of San Antonio Uniform Development Code

C. Excavating, backfilling, and compacting operations: Comply with requirements and as specified.

D. Obtain Owner’s acceptance of installed and tested irrigation system prior to installing backfill materials.

Page 75: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

IRRIGATION 328400-Page 2

1.3 SUBMITTAL

A. Submit for approval, manufacturer’s product data for all equipment and materials specified herein or proposed for use on this project. Provide information for, but not limited to:

1. Sprinklers, spray, rotary and bubblers.

2. Nozzles 3. Check Valves for all sprinklers. (Check valves are required for all sprinklers). 4. Piping 5. Pipe Fittings 6. Swing Joints 7. Pipe Cement 8. Controllers 9. Wire 10. Wire Splice Kits 11. Remote Control Valves 12. Gate or Manual Valves 13. Quick Coupler Valves 14. Backflow Prevention Devices

15. Valve Boxes (Remote control valves, backflow prevention devices, quick coupler, wire splice location, gate/manual valves, etc.)

16. And any other equipment or product necessary to properly complete the work as shown on the drawings

and specified herein.

B. On each copy of the submittal, circle in red or highlight in yellow, each specific product proposed for use. COPIES NOT SO MARKED WILL BE REJECTED.

C. Upon irrigation system acceptance, submit written operating and maintenance instructions. Provide format and con-

tents as directed by the Landscape Architect.

D. Provide irrigation system record “as-built” drawings:

1. During the course of installation, legibly mark all changes on drawings to record actual construction.

2. Upon completion of the installation, transfer the record data to a clean professional quality base drawing and submit to the Landscape Architect for approval.

a. Indicate horizontal and vertical locations referenced to permanent surface improvements.

b. Identify field changes of dimension and detail and changes made by Change Order.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver irrigation system components in manufacturer’s original undamaged and unopened containers with labels in-tact and legible.

B Deliver plastic piping in bundles, packaged to provide adequate protection of pipe ends, both threaded or plain.

C. Store and handle materials to prevent damage and deterioration. Do not store PVC pipe in direct sunlight for more

than 48 hours.

Page 76: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

IRRIGATION 328400-Page 3

D. To prevent installation delays provide secure locked storage for valves, sprinkler heads, and similar components that can not be immediately replaced.

1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Known underground and surface utility lines are indicated on the utility survey. Verify locations of all known un-derground and surface utilities by contacting the appropriate utility companies.

B. Protect existing trees, plants, lawns, and other features designated to remain as part of the final landscape work.

C. Promptly repair damage to adjacent facilities caused by irrigation system work operations. Cost of repairs at con

tractor’s expense.

D. Promptly notify the Owner of unexpected sub-surface conditions.

E. Irrigation system layout is diagrammatic. Exact locations of piping, sprinkler heads, valves, and other components shall be established by contractor in the field at time of installation. Proposed piping layout within tree drip lines will be reviewed by Architect prior to installation. Obtain Architect’s approval prior to installation.

1. Space sprinkler components as designed, not to exceed manufacturer recommendations.

2. Minor adjustments in system layout will be permitted to clear existing fixed obstructions. Final system

layout shall be acceptable to the Architect and Owner.

F. Cutting and patching: (if necessary)

1. Cut through concrete and masonry with core drills. Jack hammers not permitted.

2. Material and finishes for patching shall match existing cut surface materials and finish. Exercise special care to provide patching at openings in exterior walls watertight.

3. Methods and materials used for cutting and patching shall be acceptable to the Owner.

1.6 WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE

A. Materials and workmanship shall be fully guaranteed for one (1) year after substantial completion.

B. Backfilling of all excavation shall be guaranteed for the one (1) year guarantee period. Repair trenches which have settled.

C. Raise or lower heads to compensate for settling of lawn areas.

D. Provide a one (1) year warranty against material, installation and operation defects. Repairs, adjustments and re-

placement of defective irrigation system materials, including materials which have been installed on the work during the warranty period shall be at Contractor’s expense.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturer

1. Weathermatic

Page 77: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

IRRIGATION 328400-Page 4

2. Hunter 3. Armor Access Boxes 4. Lasco 5. Spears 6. Toro 7. Rainbird 8. Signature

B. If contractor chooses to install alternate equipment he shall submit to Architect for acceptance the following:

1. Equipment specifications and product literature

2. Pressure loss calculations including all lateral sections

2.2 MATERIALS

A. General:

1. Provide only new materials, without flaws or defects and of the highest quality of their specified class and kind.

2. Comply with pipe sizes indicated. No substitution of smaller pipes will be permitted. Larger sizes may be

used subject to acceptance of the Architect. Remove damaged and defective pipe.

3. Provide pipe continuously and permanently marked with manufacturer’s name or trademark, size schedule and type of pipe, working pressure at 73deg F. and National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) approval.

Plastic pipe, fittings, and connections;

1. Polyvinyl chloride pipe: ASTM D2241, rigid, unplasticized PVC, extruded from virgin parent material. Provide pipe homogenous throughout and free from visible cracks, holes, foreign materials, blisters, wrin-kles, and dents.

a. 1/2-inch diameter: SCH40.

b. 3/4-inch diameter and over: SCH40.

c. Main line is HDPE DR 7.3.

2. PVC pipe fittings: ASTM D2241 Schedule 40 PVC molded fittings suitable for solvent weld or slip joint

ring tight seal. For any threaded connections use only Schedule 80 PVC. Fittings made of other materials are not permitted.

a. Size slip fitting socket taper to permit a dry un-softened pipe end to be inserted no more than

halfway into the socket. Saddle and cross fittings are not permitted.

b. Schedule 80 PVC for all threaded fittings.

c. Use PVC male adapters for plastic to metal connections. Hand tighten male adapters plus one turn with a strap wrench.

B. Sprinkler heads, valves, and associated equipment.

1. Refer to drawings for materials.

Page 78: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

IRRIGATION 328400-Page 5

a. Turf areas – Rainbird 1804-SAM with MP Rotator nozzles as specified on plan. b. Rotors - Hunter I-20 Ultra Series, 4” Pop up c. RAINBIRD 1404 NOZZLE ON 6” POP UP d. Remote control valves: ICV Series by Hunter. e. Valve access box: Armor f. Valve - Weathermatic 11000CFR Series. g. Drip Tubing – Rainbird XFS Dripline, see plan for part number. h. Underground Splices - Wade or 3M DBY

C. Controls:

1. As shown on plans. Install per manufacturer recommendations on two systems and grounding. The irrigation

contractor is responsible for hiring an electrician to hardwire the controller and accessories to the irrigation sys-tem to make it functional.

D. Electric control wire:

1. Control wire shall be 14 AWG, UF Classification, UL approved for direct burial.

2. For runs longer than 2000 feet, larger cable may be used provided it conforms to controller manufacturer’s specifications for both material specification and installation.

3. All wire splices shall be protected by a valve box. All wire splices shall be shown on “as-built” drawings.

No splices will be allowed on runs of less than 500 feet. 2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Drainage fill: No. 4 to 1/2-inch washed pea gravel.

B. Fill: Clean soil free of stones larger than 3/4-inch diameter, foreign matter, organic material, and debris.

1. Provide imported fill material as required to complete the work. Obtain rights and pay all costs for import-ed materials.

2. Suitable excavated materials removed to accommodate the irrigation system work may be used as fill mate-

rial subject to the Landscape Architect’s review and acceptance.

C. Clamps; Stainless steel, worm gear hose clamps with stainless steel screws or ear type clamps.

D. Low Voltage wire connectors: WC 014 splice kit by Wade Enterprises.

E. Valve access boxes: Tapered enclosure of rigid plastic material comprised of fibrous components chemically inert and unaffected by moisture corrosion and temperature changes. Provide lid of same material, black or green in col-or. Provide 10-inch Round Valve Box for remote control valves. Use valve box extensions as necessary to maintain proper level relative to grade. Provide 10-inch Valve Box for wire splices.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION

A. Examine final grades and installation conditions. Do not start irrigation system work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

Page 79: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

IRRIGATION 328400-Page 6

B. This contractor to verify existing and proposed locations of all site utilities (i.e., gas, water, electric, telephone, sani-

tary and storm sewers, etc.) prior to any trenching and laying of pipe. In addition, this contractor shall coordinate all irrigation work with that of all other site work trades and contractors, as applicable.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Lay out and stake the location of each sprinkler head and sprinkler valve. Obtain Architects acceptance of layout prior to excavating.

B. Remove existing paving for sleeve installation if required. Saw cut existing paving to provide uniform straight tran-

sition at new to existing paving. 3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Excavating and backfilling:

1. Excavation shall include all materials encountered, except materials that cannot be excavated by normal mechanical means.

2. Excavate trenches of sufficient depth and width to permit proper handling and installation of pipe and fit-

tings as shown on Details.

3. Pulling method will not be allowed on this project. .

4. Excavate to depths required to provide earth fill or sand bedding for piping as shown on plans.

5. Fill to match adjacent grade elevations with approved earth fill material. Place and compact fill in layers not greater than 4-inch depth.

a. Provide approved sand to a point 4-inches above the top of pipe.

b. Provide clean top soil fill free of rocks and debris for top 5-inches of fill.

6. Except as indicated, install irrigation mains with a minimum cover of 10 inches based on finished grades.

Install irrigation laterals with a minimum cover of 8-inches based on finished grades.

7. Excavate trenches and install piping and fill during the same working day. Do not leave open trenches or partially filled trenches open overnight.

8. Replace paving of same materials, using joints and patterns to match existing adjoining paving surfaces.

Removal of paving or wall material and replacement thereof shall only occur when it is determined by the Architect that the sleeves installed cannot be located and other methods (i.e., jacking under the construction or re-routing piping) are not able to be executed.

B. Plastic Pipe

1. Install plastic pipe in accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions. Provide for thermal expan-

sion and contraction. HDPE pipe requires special training for installation.

Page 80: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

IRRIGATION 328400-Page 7

2. Saw cut plastic pipe larger than 2". Use a square-in sawing vice to insure a square cut. Remove burrs and shavings at cut ends prior to installation.

3. Make plastic to plastic joints with solvent weld joints or slip seal joints. Use only solvent recommended by

the pipe manufacturer. Install plastic pipe fittings in accordance with pipe manufacturer’s instructions. Contractor shall make arrangements with pipe manufacturer or distributor for all necessary field assistance.

4. Make plastic to metal joints with plastic male adapters. 5. Make solvent weld joints in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

6. Allow joints to set at least 24 hours before pressure is applied to the system.

7. Maintain pipe interiors free of dirt and debris. Close open ends of pipe by acceptable methods when pipe

installation is not in progress.

C. Sprinkler, fittings, valves, and accessories:

1. Install fittings, valves, sprinkler heads, risers, and accessories in accordance with manufacturer’s instruc-tions, except as otherwise indicated.

2. Set sprinkler heads perpendicular to finished grades, except as otherwise indicated.

3. Provide pop-up spray heads (with internal check valve) with an adjustable swing joint riser assembled as

shown on details. Pre-fabricated swing joint risers shall be Schedule 80 rated.

4. Obtain Architect’s review and acceptance of height for proposed sprinkler heads and valves prior to instal-lation.

5. Locate sprinkler heads to assure proper coverage of indicated areas. Do not exceed sprinkler head spacing

distances indicated.

6. Install in-ground control valves in a valve access box as indicated.

7. Install valve access boxes on a suitable base of gravel to provide a level foundation at proper grade and to provide drainage of the access box. Factory valve box extensions shall be required to be used if necessary.

8. Seal threaded connections on pressure side of control valves with Teflon tape. Do not use pipe joint com-

pound.

D. Control wiring

1. Install electric control cable in the mainline piping trenches wherever possible. Place wire in trench adja-cent to pipe. Install wire with slack to allow for thermal expansion and contraction. Provide expansion joints at 100 foot intervals by making 5-6 turns around a piece of 1/2-inch pipe. Where necessary to run wire in a separate trench, provide a minimum cover of 12-inches. When more than one wire is placed in a trench the wire shall be taped together at intervals of 50 feet.

2. Provide sufficient slack (expansion coil consisting of 5-6 turns around a 1/2" piece of pipe) at remote con-

trol valves in control boxes, and at all wire splices to allow raising the valve bonnet or splice to the surface without disconnecting the wires when repair is required.

3. Connect remote control valve to one station of a controller only.

Page 81: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

IRRIGATION 328400-Page 8

4. Make wire connections to remote control electric valves and splices of wire in the field, using wire con-nectors and in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

E. Sleeves:

1. Utilize existing sleeves if available for installation of the irrigation system.

2. Provide new sleeves for all locations where existing sleeves are not indicated. Install new sleeves prior to

paving installation wherever possible.

3. Install pipe sleeves under existing concrete or asphalt surfaces where cutting is necessary. Obtain Owner’s permission before cutting existing concrete and asphalt surfaces. Where piping is shown under paved areas which are adjacent to turf areas, install the piping in the turf areas.

F. Flushing, testing, and adjustment:

1. In the presence of the Architect or his Representative, hydrostatically test the mainline piping system in

place, before backfilling. Test period shall be not less than four hours at 130 PSI. Test is acceptable if no leakage occurs during test period.

2. After sprinkler piping and risers are installed and before sprinkler heads are installed, open control valves

and flush out the system with full head of water.

3. Perform system testing upon completion of each section. Make necessary repairs and retest repaired sec-tions as required.

4. Adjust sprinklers after installation for proper and adequate distribution of water over the coverage pattern.

Adjust for the proper arc of coverage.

5. Tighten nozzles on spray type sprinklers after installation. Adjust nozzle-adjusting screw on sprinklers as required for proper radius. Interchange nozzle patterns as directed by the Architect, to give best arc of cov-erage.

6. Adjust all electric remote control valve flow control stems for system balance and optimum performance.

7. Test and demonstrate the controller by operating appropriate day, hour, and station selection features as re-

quired to automatically start and shut down irrigation cycles to accommodate plant requirements and weather conditions.

8. Backflow device shall be tested and certified before substantial completion will be issued.

3.4 SPARE PARTS A. Provide the Owner additional parts as noted.

1. 2 extra sprinkler head(s) of each size and type.

2. 1 extra valve(s) of each size.

3. 2 extra valve access boxes of each size.

4. 2 CH100 quick coupling keys and 2 #10SHL hose swivels. 3.5 DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIAL

Page 82: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

IRRIGATION 328400-Page 9

A. Stockpile, haul from site, and legally dispose of waste materials, including unsuitable excavated materials, rock, and debris.

B. Maintain disposal route clear, clean, and free of debris.

3.6 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

A. An inspection of the irrigation system will be made by the Landscape Architect upon request for Application of Substantial Completion by the Contractor. The irrigation system must be sufficiently complete so that all plant ma-terial can be sustained by the system.

B. Contractor will be required to train maintenance personnel on the use and basic upkeep of this system. If this re-

sponsibility is not fulfilled, the cost of obtaining this training by the Owner shall be shown as a deduction in the final payment.

C. The Contractor shall attach a reduced scale of the area controlled by the controller on the inside of the controller

door identifying the location of the valves and the station assigned to each. 3.7 FINAL COMPLETION

A. An inspection of the irrigation system will be made by the landscape architect upon request for Final Completion by the Contractor. Provide notification of at least ten (10) working days before requested inspection date.

3.8 CLEANING

A. Perform cleaning during installation of the work and upon completion of the work. Remove from site all excess ma-terials, soil, debris, and equipment. Repair damage resulting from irrigation system installation.

END OF SECTION 328400

Page 83: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 2

TREES, PLANTS, GROUND COVER & TURF – 02950

Page 1

03/26/2018

SECTION 02950 - TREES, PLANTS AND GROUND COVER

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Provide trees, plants, and ground cover as indicated on the Drawings, specified herein, and

needed for a complete and proper installation.

B. Related work:

1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to,

General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these

Specifications.

2. Section 02810: Irrigation system.

3. Section 02970: Landscape Maintenance

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01340.

B. Product data: Within 35 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's

Notice to Proceed, submit:

1. Complete materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section.

2. Complete data on source, size, and quality.

3. Sufficient data to demonstrate compliance with the specified requirements.

C. Upon completion of the work of this Section, and as a condition of its acceptance, deliver

to the Landscape Architect two copies of a Manual compiled in accordance with the

provisions of Section 01730 of these Specifications.

D. Certificates:

1. Require certificates required by law to accompany shipments.

2. Certifications and receipts for specified materials

3. Upon completion of the installation, deliver certificates to the Landscape Architect.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in

the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and

the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.

B. Standards:

1. Plants and planting material: Meet or exceed the specifications of Federal, State,

and County laws requiring inspection for plant disease and insect control.

2. Quality and size: Comply with current edition of "Horticultural Standards" for

number one nursery stock as adopted by American Association of Nurserymen.

3. All plants:

a. True to name, with one of each bundle or lot tagged with the name and size

of the plants in accordance with standards of practice of

Page 84: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 2

TREES, PLANTS, GROUND COVER & TURF – 02950

Page 2

03/26/2018

American Association of Nurserymen.

b. In all cases, botanical names take precedence over common names.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01620. The Landscape Architect will be

notified when plant material is delivered to the site.

B. All plant material will be inspected and approved by the Landscape Architect prior to

installation.

C. Immediately remove from the site plants, which are not true to name, and materials, which

do not comply with the specified requirements, and promptly replace with plants and

materials meeting the specified requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FERTILIZER

A. Provide commercial balanced 11-8-4 fertilizer delivered to the site in bags labeled with the

manufacturer’s guaranteed analysis.

2.2 SOIL STABILIZER

A. "Terra Tack" 1 or approved equal.

2.3 SOIL AMENDMENT

A. Approved products:

1. Garden-Ville PremiumCompost “Alamo-Gro” or approved equal.

2.4 MULCH

A. Approved products:

1. Garden-Ville Native Mulch or approved equal.

2.5 HYDROMULCH

A. Provide Conwed Weyerhauser, or Texas Fiber Company hydromulch. All mulch will be

manufactured from hardwoods only and will be refined specifically for lawn hydromulch

applications.

1. Soil Stabilizer:

a. "Terra Tack" 1 or approved equal.

2.6 TREE STAKES

A. Stake trees as indicated on the Drawings.

2.7 GRASS SEED

Page 85: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 2

TREES, PLANTS, GROUND COVER & TURF – 02950

Page 3

03/26/2018

A. General: Provide grass seed which is:

1. All seed must meet the requirements of the Texas seed law including the labeling

requirements for showing pure live seed (pls=purity x germination), name and type

of seed.

2. Seed furnished shall be of the previous season crop and the date of analysis shown

on each bag shall be within nine months of the time of use on the project.

3. Seed: Conform to U.S. Department of Agriculture rules and regulations of

the Federal Seed Act and the Texas Seed Law. Seed shall be certified 90

percent pure and furnish 85 percent germination and meet the following

requirements:

a. Rye: Fresh, clean, Italian rye grass seed (lollium multi-florum), mixed

in labeled proportions. As tested, minimum percentages of impurities and

germination must be labeled. Deliver in original unopened containers.

b. Bermuda: Extra-fancy, treated, lawn type common bermuda (Cynodon

dactylon). Deliver in original, unopened container showing weight,

analysis, name of vender, and germination test results.

c. Wet, moldy, or otherwise damaged seed will not be accepted.

2.8 PLANT MATERIALS

A. Provide the plant materials shown on the schedule in the Drawings.

2.9 SOIL

A. Topsoil

1. Additional topsoil needed to complete the work shall be furnished by the contractor

from an approved source.

2. Topsoil shall be natural, friable, granular soil, which contains organic matter.

3. Topsoil shall be free of subsoil, brush, weeds, nut grass, stones, roots, stumps or

other objectionable material.

4. Samples of soil shall be submitted for testing and approval by the Landscape

Architect prior to placement.

2.10 OTHER MATERIALS

A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper

installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Landscape

Architect.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS

A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be

performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not

proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

B. Finish grading will be performed under Section 02220.

Page 86: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 2

TREES, PLANTS, GROUND COVER & TURF – 02950

Page 4

03/26/2018

C. Turf areas:

1. Incorporate 6 cubic yards of compost per 1,000 square feet of turf areas. Compost to

be spread and incorporated a minimum of 4” into the soil by the contractor

2. Fine grade to match plans within a tolerance of 0.10 foot.

3. Finished grade of topsoil shall be 1” below top of walks and curbs.

D. Planting beds:

1. Incorporate 8 cubic yards of compost per 1000 square feet of planting bed. Compost

to be spread and incorporated minimum of 12” into the soil by the contractor

2. Compact each layer by thorough saturation with water to prevent future settlement.

3.2 PLANTING TREES AND SHRUBS

A. General:

1. Plant nursery stock immediately upon delivery to the site and approval by the

Landscape Architect

2. Regularly water nursery stock in containers, and place them in a cool area protected

from sun and drying winds.

B. Excavating:

1. For shrubs in one-gal. containers, dig a hole 12" in diameter and 12" deep.

2. For shrubs and trees in five gal containers, dig a hole 20" in diameter and 18" deep.

3. For trees in l5 gal containers, dig a hole 30” in diameter and 30" deep.

4. All holes more than 12" deep, probe by hand to determine if mechanical auger will

hit any in-place utilities.

C. Planting:

1. Fill holes with backfill mixture consisting of three parts soil taken from the hole and

one part specified soil amendment, by volume.

2. Fill to proper height to receive the plant, and thoroughly tamp the mixture before

setting the plant.

3. Set plant in upright position in the center of the hole, and compact the backfill

mixture around the ball or roots.

4. Thoroughly water each plant when the hole is 2/3 full.

5. After watering, tamp the soil in place until the surface of the backfill is level with

the surrounding area and the crown of the plant is at the finished grade of the

surrounding area.

6. Build up a temporary watering basin around the base of each tree and shrub, unless

otherwise directed by the Landscape Architect, except no basins around trees and.

shrubs in turf area or in raised planter beds.

D. Apply the specified mulch to a depth of 4" and spread evenly over the entire area of each

tree soil basin and over the entire planting bead area for shrubs.

3.3 PLANTING GROUND COVER

A. Rake planting areas smooth and free from soil lumps, rocks, sticks, and other deleterious

material.

B. Planting:

Page 87: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 2

TREES, PLANTS, GROUND COVER & TURF – 02950

Page 5

03/26/2018

1. Space the ground cover plants evenly as indicated on the Drawings, staggering the

spaces around shrubs and trees as well as in the open areas.

2. Plant only in soil that is moist but friable, never wet or soggy.

3. Apply the specified mulch to a depth of 4" and spread evenly over the entire

planting bead area for ground cover.

4. In case of planting in the open on hot days, shorten the time between planting and

watering.

3.4 TURF GRASS

A. Preparation:

1. Grade seed beds, thoroughly removing ridges and depressions, and making areas

smooth, continuous, firm planes that ensure proper drainage.

2. Remove soil lumps, rocks, sticks, and other deleterious material subject to approval

of the Landscape Architect.

B. Hydroseeding:

1. Hydromulch seed immediately upon completion of the fine grading

2. Mulch: Virgin wood cellulose fibers from whole wood chips having a

minimum of 20% fibers 0.42 inches (10.7 mm) in length and 0.01 inches

(0.27 mm) in diameter. Hydromulch material shall be dyed green for

coverage verification purposes. Apply hydromulch material at a rate of 65

lbs. dry weight per 1000 sq. ft. of turf area with soil stabilizer uniformly

within mulch mix at a rate of 1 lb. per 1000 sq. ft. and fertilizer uniformly

within mulch mix at a rate of 10 pounds 1000 sq. ft. 3. Seed at the rate of two lbs. per 1000 sq. ft. for Hulled Bermuda grass from April 1

to September 30. A 95% coverage rate of Bermuda Grass will be required for

acceptance by the owner. Seed at the rate of five lbs. per 1000 sq. ft. for Annual

Rye Grass from October 1 to March 31. Rye grass is required only as a stabilization

grass October 1 to March 31.

4. Contractor will be required to certify the application at the rates stated above in a

written submittal to the Landscape architect that includes dated receipts for all

materials listed above.

C. Fertilizing:

1. Apply the specified fertilizer at the rate of 10 lbs per 1000 square feet.

D. Protect turf areas from vehicular traffic and vandalism.

1. No heavy equipment shall be moved over the planted lawn area unless the soil is

again prepared, graded, leveled, and replanted.

2. It will be the responsibility of this Contractor to protect all turf grass areas from

damage. Any damages shall be repaired or replaced at no cost to the owner.

E. Establishment:

1. Regardless of unseasonable climatic conditions or other adverse conditions

affecting planting operations and the growth of the turf grass, it shall be the

sole responsibility of the Contractor to establish a 95% coverage, uniform

stand of turf grass as herein specified. The Contractor will be allowed 60

Page 88: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 2

TREES, PLANTS, GROUND COVER & TURF – 02950

Page 6

03/26/2018

days to achieve 95% coverage. If 95% coverage is not achieved within the

60 day period the Contractor will be required to solid sod the entire turf area

at the Contractors Expense. 2. When adverse conditions such as drought, cold weather, high winds, excessive

precipitation, or other factors prevail to such an extent that satisfactory results are

unlikely, the Landscape Architect may, at his own discretion, stop any phase of the

work until conditions change to favor the establishment of turf grass.

3. Maintenance shall begin immediately after each portion of grass area is planted. All

planted areas will be protected and maintained by watering, weed and litter control,

and replanting as necessary after initial planting and for as long as necessary to

establish a uniform stand with complete coverage of the specified grass.

F. Uniform stand of turf grass:

1. A uniform stand with complete coverage of the specified grass shall be defined as

not less than 95 % of the planted area shall be covered with the specified turf grass.

2. Thirty (30) days following planting, the Landscape Architect will inspect the

planted areas to verify establishment as described above.

3. Contractor will be required to replant and/or maintain any areas of grass that are

unacceptable to the Landscape Architect until they meet the standards above. Partial

projects will not be accepted.

G. Sod:

1. Areas to be having sod are indicated on the plan.

2. Lay sod in running bond pattern.

3. Lay without gaps or openings between slabs.

4. Lay parallel to slopes.

5. Roll in two directions and thoroughly wet.

6. All sod shall be “Tiff 419” Bermuda unless otherwise indicated in the plans.

3.5 STAKING

A. Stake trees as indicated on the drawings.

B. Do not plant until staked locations have been approved by the landscape architect.

3.6 INSPECTION

A. In addition to normal progress observations, schedule and conduct the following formal

inspections, giving the Landscape Architect at least 24 hours advance notice of readiness

for inspection:

1. Inspection of plants in containers prior to planting.

2. Inspection of plant locations, to verify compliance with the Drawings.

3. inspection after completion of planting:

a. Schedule this inspection sufficiently in advance, and in cooperation with

the Landscape Architect, so final inspection may be conducted within 24

hours after completion of planting.

4. Final inspection at completion of the project provided that previous deficiencies

have been corrected.

Page 89: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 2

TREES, PLANTS, GROUND COVER & TURF – 02950

Page 7

03/26/2018

3.7 MAINTENANCE

A. Maintain planting, starting with the planting operations and continuing until project is

accepted by the owner.

B. Work included:

1. Watering, weeding, cultivating, spraying, mowing and pruning necessary to keep

the plant materials in a healthy growing condition and to keep the planted areas neat

and attractive throughout the maintenance period.

2. Turf will be mowed on a seven day cycle at a height of 1”.

3. Appropriate herbicides shall be applied as necessary as previously specified to

eliminate all broadleaf weed species.

4. Provide equipment and means for proper application of water to those planted areas

not equipped with an irrigation system.

5. Protect planted areas against damage, including erosion and trespassing, by

providing and maintaining proper safeguards.

C. Erosion Control:

1. Throughout the project and the maintenance period for turf grass, it is the

Contractor's responsibility to maintain the topsoil in place at specified grades.

Topsoil, turf grass and plant losses due to erosion will be replaced by the Contractor

until establishment and acceptance are achieved.

D. Replacements:

1. At the end of the maintenance period, all plant material shall be in a healthy

growing condition.

2. During the maintenance period, should the appearance of any plant indicate

weakness and probability of dying immediately replace that plant with a new and

healthy plant of the same type and size without additional cost to the Owner.

E. Extension of maintenance period:

1. The entire project will continue to be replanted and maintained by the Contractor

until complete coverage and acceptance are achieved over one hundred (100%)

percent of the area at which time the final inspection will be made.

PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

A. No separate payment shall be made to the CONTRACTOR for the work described in this

Section. Payments made under the lump sum shall be considered as full compensation for

these requirements

END OF SECTION

Page 90: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 2 LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE – 02970

Page 1

03/26/2018

SECTION 02970 - LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Maintain irrigation system and installed plant materials as specified herein during construction until acceptance by the owner.

B. Related work:

1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications.

2. Section 02810: Irrigation system. 3. Section 02950: Trees, Shrubs, Ground Cover and Turf.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01340.

B. Product data: Submit the following in sufficient time to enable its orderly review and

return prior to scheduled commencement of other work of this Section: 1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section; 2. Manufacturer's recommended procedures which, when approved by the Landscape

Architect, will become the basis for accepting or rejecting actual procedures used on the Work.

C. Each 30 calendar days during progress of the work of this Section, submit a report to the

Landscape Architect (with a copy to the person so designated by the Owner) listing all herbicides, insecticides, and disease control chemicals used.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in

the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01620.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 HERBICIDES

A. Provide the following, or equals approved in advance by the Landscape Architect: 1. Pre-emergent herbicide: "Ronstar" manufactured by the Chipman Division of

Rhodia, Inc.

Page 91: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 2 LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE – 02970

Page 2

03/26/2018

2. Post-emergent herbicide: Any herbicide which does not leave a stain or residue and which is approved in advance by the Landscape Architect.

2.2 PEST CONTROL

A. Provide the following, or equals approved in advance by the Landscape Architect:

1. Insect control: A chemical insecticide to control insects, as approved by the Landscape Architect.

2. Other pest control: Products to control snails, rodents, and other pests and diseases, as approved in advance by the Landscape Architect.

2.3 FERTILIZERS

A. Provide the following, or equals approved in advance by the Landscape Architect:

1. Soils suitability and fertility analysis report: Comply with soils report recommendation for fertilization type and schedule, as approved in advance by the Landscape Architect.

2. Palm tree fertilizer: a. Root growth stimulant: Vitamin B-l

manufactured by Cal-Liquid, Cooke, or Ortho; b. Fertilizer: 20-10-5 commercial fertilizer.

3. All other fertilizer: balanced 11-8-4 fertilizer

2.4 WATER

A. Use only water, which is fresh and potable. PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS

A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

3.2 PLANT INSTALLATION PERIOD

A. The plant installation period is hereby defined as starting with commencement of planting

operations and continuing until final inspection and approval by the Landscape Architect.

B. Where trees, shrubs, ground covers and turf are dead or show evidence of dieback or disease, promptly replace with new, vigorous, and healthy trees at no additional cost to the Owner.

3.3 MAINTENANCE PERIOD

A. General:

Page 92: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 2 LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE – 02970

Page 3

03/26/2018

1. The plant maintenance period is hereby defined as starting at completion of the plant installation period and will continue to the final acceptance date of the entire project.

2. It is anticipated that the Owner may occupy or perform associated work during the plant maintenance period.

3. Provide a level of maintenance that presents a pleasing and desirable appearance at all times and complies with the requirements of section 02950 Trees, Plants, Groundcover and Turf.

B. Erosion Control:

1. Throughout the project and the maintenance period for turf grass, it is the Contractor's responsibility to maintain the topsoil in place at specified grades. Topsoil, turf grass and plant losses due to erosion will be replaced by the Contractor until establishment and acceptance are achieved.

C. Replacements:

1. At the end of the maintenance period, all plant material shall be in a healthy growing condition.

2. During the maintenance period, should the appearance of any plant indicate weakness and probability of dying immediately replace that plant with a new and healthy plant of the same type and size without additional cost to the Owner.

3. Replacements required because of vandalism or other causes beyond control of the Contractor are not part of the Contract.

D. Tree maintenance:

1. Remove damaged branches back to point of growth, treating cuts over 2" in diameter with an approved tree wound dressing.

2. Restake and support trees as necessary, placing stakes and ties so that no chaffing or girdling of bark will occur.

3. Prune trees as directed by the Landscape Architect. 4. Replace diseased, damaged and dying trees with replacement trees as originally

specified

E. Shrub and Ground Cover Maintenance: 1. Remove damaged branches back to point of growth. 2. Prune shrubs and ground covers to maintain the natural character and shape of the

specific species of plant 3. Replace diseased, damaged and dying plants with replacement plants as originally

specified

F. Palm tree maintenance: 1. General:

a. Maintain and guarantee all installed new palms. b. Provide required water management, pruning, fertilizing, pest control, and

disease control. c. Prune to maintain a neat appearance as approved by the Landscape

Architect. Prune in accordance with a schedule approved by the Landscape Architect.

Page 93: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 2 LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE – 02970

Page 4

03/26/2018

2. Irrigation: a. Apply water in sufficient amount at each irrigation to wet the soil to a depth

of six to eight feet. b. Schedule the frequency and amount of irrigation to maintain moisture

depending upon soil type and time of year. c. Monitor the soil moisture until experience gained is sufficient to be used in

irrigating. d. Monitor installed tensiometers not less than once each week, logging the

results and irrigating accordingly. e. Do not permit palms to be overwatered or underwatered at any time during

the establishment and maintenance periods. 3. Fertilizing:

a. Do not fertilize palm trees at time of planting. b. Four months after planting, apply 20-10-5 at the rate of 1/2 lb per tree,

cultivating or injecting into the soil below the turf. c. Apply fertilizer only between March and August, and then in two or more

applications. Should this period not coincide with the maintenance period, provides the Owner's maintenance personnel the amount of fertilizer required for this application, with clear instructions regarding its application.

d. Nitrogen: 1) Apply inorganic nitrogen to palm trees at the rate of four to six

lbs of inorganic nitrogen per palm per year; 2) Apply the nitrogen to the surface, followed by a normal

watering period to take the nitrogen into the soil, or apply the nitrogen deep by injection;

3) In lawn areas, apply in such a manner that the water takes the nitrogen beyond the grass roots to prevent the grass from competing for the nitrogen;

4) Coordinate method of application and schedule for application with the Owner's maintenance personnel.

4. Pruning: a. Pruning of the palms is for cosmetic purposes and to prevent fruit drop on

the walkways. b. Annual pruning (in the period from June 1 to August 30) is for removal of

both flower stalks and unsightly fronds. 1) If the annual pruning coincides with the plant establishment

period or plant maintenance period, perform the pruning as part of the work of this Section.

2) Remove all flower stalks along with the dead fronds. 3) Remove green fronds to the extent that such removal does not

detract from the aesthetic appearance as approved by the Landscape Architect.

4) Do not remove more than one third of the green fronds at one time. 5) Perform pruning with reciprocal saws (not chain saws). 6) Before pruning commences, and after pruning each tree but before

pruning the next tree, sterilize the saw blades by immersing the saw blades in a solution of 50% liquid household laundry bleach and 50% water for five minutes.

Page 94: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 2 LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE – 02970

Page 5

03/26/2018

c. Coordinate pruning activities with the Owner's maintenance personnel.

G. Turf maintenance: 1. Mowing:

a. Mow all turf areas on a seven day cycle. b. Neatly edge the borders, trimming turf around planters and around sprinkler

heads as needed to provide maximum water coverage. c. Commence mowing turf when the grass has reached a height of 1-1/2", and

maintain a grass height of 1" for all subsequent. d. Maintain turf as well established, uniform, smooth in texture, and free from

bare spots and weeds to the approval of the Landscape Architect. 2. Apply herbicide as required to eliminate 100% of all grass species other than the

specified Bermuda Grass and all broadleaf weeds. 3. Watering, weeding, cultivating, spraying, mowing and pruning necessary to

keep the plant materials in a healthy growing condition and to keep the planted areas neat and attractive throughout the maintenance period.

4. Protect planted areas against damage, including erosion and trespassing, by providing and maintaining proper safeguards.

5. Apply 11-8-4 fertilizer at the rate of six to ten lbs per 1,000 sq. ft on a monthly basis beginning approximately 14 calendar days after seed germination.

6. Aerify turf areas 60 days after seed germination.

H. Irrigation system maintenance: 1. Maintain the complete irrigation system in an operable and appropriate manner. 2. Repair and adjust all sprinkler heads to maintain the proper coverage, including

adjusting heads to proper height. 3. Water will be applied at a minimum rate of 1.50” per week. Adjusts water

application to compensate for changes in weather. The contractor will be responsible for damages occurring due to under watering.

4. Make replacements with new material identical to the original. 5. Replace all damaged or inoperative equipment within one watering period. 6. Operationally check all systems at least once each week. 7. This system will be part of the City of Boerne’s central irrigation control system.

The contractor must coordinate operation of the controller with city staff.

I. Extension of maintenance period: 1. The entire project will continue to be replanted and maintained by the Contractor

until complete coverage and acceptance are achieved over one hundred (100%) percent of the area at which time the final inspection will be made.

J. Replacements:

1. At the end of the maintenance period, all plant material shall be in a healthy growing condition.

2. During the maintenance period, should the appearance of any plant indicate weakness and probability of dying immediately replace that plant with a new and healthy plant of the same type and size without additional cost to the Owner.

Page 95: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 2 LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE – 02970

Page 6

03/26/2018

K. General maintenance: 1. Prune and trim all vegetation, new and previously existing, to prevent overhanging

sidewalks at less than 7"0" in height, at roadways less than 14"0" in height, and adjacent to roadway intersections, in a manner providing adequate sight distance for vehicles entering the intersection.

2. Conduct all operations so as to provide maximum safety for the public. 3. Remove leaves, paper, weeds, and debris from landscaped areas, and dispose of in a

legal manner off-site. 4. Clean sidewalks, roadways, and other. Areas affected by operations under this

Section. 5. Specialty type maintenance operations: a. Specialty type maintenance operations are defined as:

1) Fertilization 2) Pre-emergent applications of herbicides and insecticides 3) Turf aerification 4) Preventive application of turf fungicide

5. Emergency communications: a. Maintain an office for the duration project and provide the office with

telephone service during normal working hours. b. If a telephone answering service is utilized, provide the answering service

with capability of contacting the Contractor's personnel by radio or pager. c. Provide the Landscape Architect and the Owner’s maintenance personnel

with an emergency telephone number for contact outside normal working hours.

6. Using a licensed pest control applicator, apply herbicide only when the air is still to prevent herbicide drift onto adjacent property and non-target planting.

7. Control rodents, snails, and other pests and diseases as required. PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

A. No separate payment shall be made to the CONTRACTOR for the work described in this Section. Such work shall be considered incidental to the project and the payments made under lump sum shall be considered as full compensation for these requirements

END OF SECTION

Page 96: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 3 CONCRETE FORMWORK – 03100

Page 1

03/26/2018

SECTION 03100 - CONCRETE FORMWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. Provide formwork in accordance with provisions of this Section for cast-in-place concrete shown on the Drawings or required by other Sections of these Specifications.

B. Related work:

1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications.

2. Section 02520 – Portland Cement Concrete Paving and Building Pads 3. Section 03301 – Concrete 4. Section 02226 – Excavating, Backfill and Compacting for Pavement 5. Section 03200 - Concrete reinforcement 6. Section 02225 – Excavating, Backfill and Compacting for Utilities

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01340. B. Product data: Within 35 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's Notice

to Proceed, submit manufacturers’ data and installation instructions for proprietary materials including form coatings, ties, and accessories, and manufactured form systems if used.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.

B. Design of formwork is the Contractor's responsibility.

C. Standards: In addition to complying with pertinent regulations of governmental agencies

having jurisdiction, comply with pertinent provisions of ACI 347. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01620. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FORM MATERIALS

A. Except for metal forms, use new materials. Materials may be re-used during progress of the Work, provided they are completely cleaned and reconditioned, recoated for each use, and capable of producing formwork of the required quality.

Page 97: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 3 CONCRETE FORMWORK – 03100

Page 2

03/26/2018

B. For footings and foundations, use Douglas Fir boards or planks secured to wood or steel stakes, substantially constructed to shades indicated and to support the required loads.

C. Studs for walls, walks, trails, and supports, use Standard grade or better Douglas Fir,

dimensions as required to support the loads but not less than 2" x 4" nominal size.

D. Wall forms: 1. Exposed concrete surfaces:

a. Use 3/4” actual minimum thickness Douglas Fir plywood, grade B/B, class I or II, exterior sanded both sides, complying with PS-l.

b. Seal edges and coat both faces with colorless coating which will not affect application of applied finishes.

2. Unexposed concrete surfaces: a. Use 1” x 6" nominal size shiplap Douglas Fir boards, surfaced one side and

two edges, or 3/4" actual minimum thickness Douglas Fir plywood, grade B/B plyform class I or II, sanded both sides, mill-oiled.

E. Column forms, if required:

1. For square or rectangular columns, use 2” nominal thickness Douglas Fir planks or joists, surfaced one side and two edges, or use metal forms.

2. For round columns, use metal forms or patented paper tube forms approved by the LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT.

3. Construct column forms with tight joints and securely clamped together with steel clamps.

F. Walk and trail forms:

1. Standard grade or better Douglas Fir, dimensions as required to support the loads but not less than 2" nominal thickness.

2. Form sides of walk to full depth of concrete including standard 8" depth beam.

3. Kerf 2" nominal thickness forms to provide smooth curves per plans. 4. Masonite, Hardie board, plywood, plastic, or other similar materials are not

acceptable as form material.

2.2 FORM TIES

A. Hold inner and outer forms for vertical concrete together with combination steel ties and spreaders approved by the LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT.

1. Space ties symmetrically in tiers and rows, each tier plumb from top to bottom and each row level.

2. At horizontal pour lines, locate ties not more than 6” below the pour lines. Tighten after concrete has set and before the next pour is made.

3. For exposed concrete surfaces, provide form ties of removable type with she-bolts equipped with permanent plugs and a system approved by the LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT for fixing the plugs in place.

Page 98: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 3 CONCRETE FORMWORK – 03100

Page 3

03/26/2018

2.3 DESIGN OF FORMWORK

A. General: 1. Design, erect, support, brace, and maintain formwork so it will safely support

vertical and lateral loads that might be applied, until such loads can be supported by the concrete structure.

2. Carry vertical and lateral loads to ground by formwork system and in-place construction that has attained adequate strength for that purpose.

3. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of correct size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position.

4. Design forms and formwork to include assumed values of live load, dead load, weight of moving equipment operated on the formwork, concrete mix, height of concrete drop, vibrator frequency, ambient temperature, foundation pressures, stresses, lateral stability, and other factors pertinent to safety of the structure during construction.

5. Provide shores and struts with positive means of adjustment capable of taking up formwork settlement during concrete placing operations, using wedges, jacks, or a combination thereof.

6. Provide trussed supports when adequate foundations for shores and struts cannot be secured.

7. Support form materials by structural members spaced sufficiently close to prevent objectionable deflection.

8. Fit forms placed in successive units for continuous surfaces to accurate alignment, free from irregularities, and within the allowable tolerances.

9. Provide formwork sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of cement paste during concrete placement. Solidly butt joints, and provide backup material at joints as required to prevent leakage and prevent fins.

10. Provide camber in formwork as required for anticipated deflections due to weight and pressures of fresh concrete and construction loads.

2.4 EARTH FORMS

A. Side forms for footings may be omitted, and concrete may be placed directly against evacuation, only when requested by the Contractor and approved by the LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT.

B. When omission of forms is accepted, provide additional concrete 1" on each side of the

minimum design profiles and dimensions shown on the Drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS

A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

3.2 FORM CONSTRUCTION

A. General:

Page 99: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 3 CONCRETE FORMWORK – 03100

Page 4

03/26/2018

1. Construct forms complying with ACI 347 to the exact sizes, shapes, lines, and dimensions shown, and as required to obtain accurate alignment, location, grades, and level and plumb work in the finished structure.

2. Provide for openings, offsets, keyways, recesses, moldings, reglets, chamfers, blocking, screeds, bulkheads, anchorages, inserts, and other features as required.

B. Fabrication:

1. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces.

2. Provide crush plates or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces.

3. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, to prevent swelling and assure ease of removal.

4. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces where so directed by the LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT.

C. Forms for exposed concrete:

1. Drill forms to suit ties being used, and to prevent leakage of cement paste around tie holes. Do not splinter forms by driving ties through improperly prepared holes.

2. Provide sharp, clean corners at intersecting planes, without visible edges or offsets. Back the joints with extra studs or girts to maintain true square intersections.

3. Use extra studs, walls, and bracing to prevent objectionable bowing of forms between studs, and to avoid bowed appearance in concrete. Do not use narrow strips of form material, which will produce bow.

D. Corner treatment:

1. Unless shown otherwise, form chamfers with 3/4"x3/4” strips, accurately formed and surfaced to produce uniformly straight lines and tight edges.

2. Extend terminal edges to required limit, and miter the chamfer strips at changes in direction.

E. Locate control joints as indicated on the Drawings and, where required but not shown on the

Drawings, as approved by the LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT. F. Provisions for other trades:

1. Provide openings in concrete formwork to accommodate work of other trades. 2. Verify size and location of openings, recesses, and chases with the trade requiring

such items. 3. Accurately place and securely support items to be built into the concrete.

3.3 FORM COATINGS

A. Coat form contact surfaces with form coating compound before reinforcement is placed. 1. Do not allow excess form coating material to accumulate in the forms or to come

in contact with surfaces which will bond to fresh concrete. 2. Apply the form coating material in strict accordance with its manufacturer’s

recommendations. 3.

Page 100: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 3 CONCRETE FORMWORK – 03100

Page 5

03/26/2018

3.4 REMOVAL OF FORMS

A. General: 1. Do not disturb or remove forms until the concrete has hardened sufficiently to

permit form removal with complete safety. 2. Do not remove shoring until the member has acquired sufficient strength to

support its own weight, the load upon it, and the added load of construction. 3. Do not strip floor slabs in less than two days. 4. Do not strip vertical concrete in less than seven days.

B. Finished surfaces:

1. Exercise care in removing forms from finished concrete surfaces so that surfaces are not marred or gouged, and that corners are true, sharp, and unbroken.

2. Release sleeve nuts or clamps, and pull the form ties neatly. 3. Do not permit steel spreaders, form ties, or other metal to project from, or be

visible on, any concrete surface except where so shown on the Drawings. 4. Solidly pack form tie holes, rod holes, and similar holes in the concrete. For

packing, use the cement grout specified in Section 03300 of these Specifications, flushing the holes with water before packing, screeding off flush, and grinding to match adjacent surfaces.

PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

A. No separate payment shall be made to the CONTRACTOR for the work described in this Section. Such work shall be considered incidental to the project and the payments made under lump sum shall be considered as full compensation for these requirements

END OF SECTION

Page 101: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 3 DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS AND SHAFTS - 03163

Page 1

5/24/2013

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes dry-installed drilled piers.

1.2 UNIT PRICES

A. Unit prices are included in Division 01 Section "Unit Prices."

B. Drilled Piers: Actual net volume of drilled piers in place and approved. Actual length, shaft diameter, may vary, to coincide with elevations where satisfactory bearing strata are encountered. These dimensions may also vary with actual bearing value of bearing strata determined by an independent testing and inspecting agency. Adjustments will be made on net variation of total quantities, based on design dimensions for shafts.

1. Base bids on indicated number of drilled piers and, for each pier, the design length from top elevation to bottom of shaft and the diameter of shaft.

2. Unit prices include labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals required for excavation, trimming, shoring, casings, dewatering, reinforcement, concrete fill, testing, inspecting, and other items for complete drilled-pier installation.

C. Rock Measurement: Volume of rock actually removed, measured in original position, but not to exceed outside dimensions of drilled piers cast against rock. Unit prices for rock excavation include replacement with approved materials.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture.

C. Shop Drawings: For location of concrete piers, pier dimensions (diameter and depth), and concrete reinforcement.

D. Welding certificates.

E. Material certificates and/or test reports.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

Page 102: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 3 DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS AND SHAFTS - 03163

Page 2

5/24/2013

2. AWS D1.4, "Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel."

B. Drilled-Pier Standard: Comply with ACI 336.1 unless modified in this Section.

C. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Project-Site Information: A geotechnical report has been prepared for this Project and is available for information only. The opinions expressed in this report are those of geotechnical engineer and represent interpretations of subsoil conditions, tests, and results of analyses conducted by geotechnical engineer. Owner will not be responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn from this data.

1. Make additional test borings and conduct other exploratory operations necessary for drilled piers.

2. The geotechnical report is included elsewhere in the Project Manual.

B. Survey Work: Engage a qualified land surveyor or professional engineer to perform surveys, layouts, and measurements for drilled piers. Before excavating, lay out each drilled pier to lines and levels required. Record actual measurements of each drilled pier's location, shaft diameter, bottom and top elevations, deviations from specified tolerances, and other specified data.

1. Record and maintain information pertinent to each drilled pier and cooperate with Owner's testing and inspecting agency to provide data for required reports.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed.

B. Retain first paragraph below for reinforcement that is welded or if added ductility is sought.

C. Plain-Steel Wire: ASTM A82, as drawn.

2.2 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of same type, brand, and source, throughout Project:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I. Supplement with the following in an amount equal to or greater than 25% of the weight of all cementitious materials:

a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or Class F.

Page 103: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 3 DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS AND SHAFTS - 03163

Page 3

5/24/2013

B. Normal-Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33, graded, 3/4-inch nominal maximum coarse-aggregate size.

1. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.

C. Water: ASTM C 94 and potable.

D. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride.

1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/, Type A. 2. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D. 3. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type G. 4. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017, Type II.

2.3 STEEL CASINGS

A. Steel Pipe Casings: ASTM A 283, Grade C, or ASTM A 36, carbon-steel plate, with joints full-penetration welded according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

2.4 CONCRETE MIXTURES AND MIXING

A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301.

B. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement according to ACI 301 limits as if concrete were exposed to deicing chemicals.

C. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.15 percent by weight of cement.

D. Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:

1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 3,000 psi minimum or as indicated on plans. 2. Air Content: Do not air entrain concrete.

E. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94, and furnish batch ticket information.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

Page 104: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 3 DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS AND SHAFTS - 03163

Page 4

5/24/2013

3.1 EXCAVATION

A. Unclassified Excavation: Excavate to bearing elevations regardless of character of surface and subsurface conditions encountered.

B. Classified Excavation: Excavation is classified as standard excavation, special excavation, and obstruction removal and includes excavation to bearing elevations as follows:

1. Standard excavation includes excavation accomplished with conventional augers fitted with soil or rock teeth, drilling buckets, or underreaming tools attached to drilling equipment of size, power, torque, and downthrust necessary for the Work.

2. Special excavation includes excavation that requires special equipment or procedures above or below indicated depth of drilled piers where drilled-pier excavation equipment used in standard excavation, operating at maximum power, torque, and downthrust, cannot advance the shaft.

3. Obstructions: Payment for removing unanticipated boulders, concrete, masonry, or other subsurface obstructions that cannot be removed by conventional augers fitted with soil or rock teeth, drilling buckets, or underreaming tools attached to drilling equipment of size, power, torque, and downthrust necessary for the Work will be according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work.

C. Excavate shafts for drilled piers to indicated elevations. Remove loose material from bottom of excavation.

D. Notify and allow testing and inspecting agency to test and inspect bottom of excavation. If unsuitable bearing stratum is encountered, make adjustments to drilled piers as determined by Architect.

1. Do not excavate shafts deeper than elevations indicated unless approved by Architect. 2. Payment for additional authorized excavation will be according to Contract provisions for

changes in the Work.

E. End-Bearing Drilled Piers: Probe with auger to a depth below bearing elevation, equal to diameter of the bearing area of drilled pier. Determine whether voids, clay seams, or solution channels exist.

F. Temporary Casings: Install watertight steel casings of sufficient length and thickness to prevent water seepage into shaft; to withstand compressive, displacement, and withdrawal stresses; and to maintain stability of shaft walls.

1. Remove temporary casings, maintained in plumb position, during concrete placement and before initial set of concrete.

G. Tolerances: Construct drilled piers to remain within ACI 336.1 tolerances.

Page 105: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 3 DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS AND SHAFTS - 03163

Page 5

5/24/2013

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install steel casings of minimum wall thickness indicated and of diameter not less than diameter of drilled pier.

B. Comply with recommendations in CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement.

C. Place concrete in continuous operation and without segregation immediately after inspection and approval of shaft by Owner's independent testing and inspecting agency.

D. Place concrete to fall vertically down the center of drilled pier without striking sides of shaft or steel reinforcement. Vibrate top 60 inches of concrete.

E. Coordinate withdrawal of temporary casings with concrete placement to maintain at least a 60-inch head of concrete above bottom of casing. Vibrate top 60 inches of concrete after withdrawal of temporary casing.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspections:

1. Drilled piers. 2. Excavation. 3. Concrete.

B. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

C. Drilled-Pier Tests and Inspections: For each drilled pier, before concrete placement.

1. Soil Testing: Bottom elevations, bearing capacities, and lengths of drilled piers indicated have been estimated from available soil data. Actual elevations and drilled-pier lengths and bearing capacities will be determined by testing and inspecting agency. Final evaluations and approval of data will be determined by Architect.

D. Concrete Tests and Inspections: ACI 301.

PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

A. A. No separate payment shall be made to the CONTRACTOR for the work described in this Section. Payments made under the lump sum shall be considered as full compensation for these requirements.

END OF SECTION

Page 106: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 3 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT - 03200

Page 1

03/26/2018

03200 – CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. Provide concrete reinforcement where shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation.

B. Related work:

1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications.

2. Section 03100 - Concrete formwork 3. Section 02520 – Portland Cement Concrete Paving and Building Pads 4. Section 03301 – Concrete 5. Section 02226 – Excavating, Backfill and Compacting for Pavement 6. Section 03200 – Concrete reinforcement. 7. Section 02225 – Excavating, Backfill and Compacting for Utilities.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01340.

B. Product data: Within 35 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's Notice to Proceed, submit: 1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section; 2. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with

the specified requirements; 3. Shop Drawings showing details of bars, anchors, and other items, if any, provided

under this Section. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.

B. Comply with pertinent provisions of the following, except as may be modified herein.

1. ACI 318; 2. CRSI "Manual of Standard Practice."

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01520.

B. Delivery and storage: 1. Use necessary precautions to maintain identification after bundles are broken.

Page 107: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 3 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT - 03200

Page 2

03/26/2018

2. Store in a manner to prevent excessive rusting and fouling with dirt, grease, and other bond-breaking coatings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 REINFORCEMENT MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES

A. Bars: 1. Provide deformed billet steel bars complying with ASTM A615, using grades

shown on the Drawings. 2. Where grades are not shown on the Drawings, use grade 60.

B. Steel wire:

1. Comply with ASTM A82. 2. For tie wire, comply with Fed Spec QQ-W-45l, annealed steel, black, 16 gage

minimum.

C. Welded wire fabric: 1. Provide welded steel, complying with ASTM Al85.

D. Welding electrodes:

1. Comply with AWS A5.l, low hydrogen, E70 series.

E. Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcement in place: 1. Use wire bar type supports complying with CRSI recommendations, unless

otherwise shown on the Drawings. 2. Do not use wood, brick, or other non-complying material. 3. For slabs on grade, use supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where base

material will not support chair legs. 4. For exposed-to-view concrete surfaces, where legs of supports are in contact with

forms, provide supports with either hot-dip galvanized or plastic-protected legs. 2.2 FABRICATION

A. General: 1. Fabricate reinforcing bars to conform to the required shapes and dimensions, with

fabrication tolerances complying with the CRSI Manual. 2. In case of fabricating errors, do not straighten or rebend reinforcement in a manner

that will weaken or injure the material. 3. Reinforcement with any of the following defects will not be acceptable.

a. Bar lengths, depths, and/or bends exceeding the specified fabrication tolerances;

b. Bends or kinks not shown on the Drawings; c. Bars with reduced cross-section due to excessive rusting or other cause.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS

Page 108: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 3 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT - 03200

Page 3

03/26/2018

A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: 1. Comply with the specified standards for detail and method of placing reinforcement

and supports, except as may be modified herein. 2. Clean reinforcement to remove loose rust and mill scale, earth, and other materials,

which reduce or destroy bond with concrete. 3. Position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement by formwork,

construction, and concrete placing operations. 4. Locate and support reinforcement by metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers, and

hangers, as required. 5. Place reinforcement to obtain minimum coverage for concrete protection. 6. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports together with the specified tie

wire. 7. Set wire ties so twisted ends are directed away from exposed concrete surfaces.

B. Install welded wire fabric in as long lengths as practicable, lapping adjoining pieces at least

one full mesh.

C. Provide sufficient numbers of supports and of strength to carry the reinforcement.

D. Do not place reinforcing bars more than 2" beyond last leg of any continuous bar support.

E. Do not use supports as bases for runways for concrete conveying equipment and similar construction loads.

3.3 SPLICES

A. Lap splices: 1. Tie securely with the specified wire to prevent displacement of splices during

placement of concrete.

B. Splice devices: 1. Obtain the Architect’s approval prior to using splice devices. 2. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions. 3. Splice in a manner developing at least 125% of the yielding strength of the bar.

C. Welding:

1. Perform in accordance with AWS D1.4-79.

D. Do not splice bars except at locations shown on the Drawings, except as otherwise

specifically approved by the Architect. 3.4 TESTING

Page 109: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 3 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT - 03200

Page 4

03/26/2018

A. Samples:

1. Samples for physical tests of reinforcement will consist of at least two pieces, each 18" long, of each size of reinforcement steel, selected by the testing agency from material at the building site or at the fabricator's or supplier's yard.

2. Material to be sampled at the building site shall have been delivered thereto at least 72 hours before it is needed.

B. Tests:

1. Where samples are taken from bundles as delivered from the mill, with the bundles identified as to heat number, and provided mill analyses accompany the report, then one tensile test and one bend test will be made from a specimen of each ten tons or fraction thereof of each size of reinforcement steel.

2. Where positive identification of the heat number cannot be made, or where random samples are taken, then one series of tests will be made from each 2-1/2 tons or fraction thereof of each size of reinforcement steel.

3. Payment for testing is described in Section 01410 of these Specifications. PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

A. No separate payment shall be made to the CONTRACTOR for the work described in this Section. Payments made under the lump sum shall be considered as full compensation for these requirements

END OF SECTION

Page 110: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 3 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE – 03300

Page 1

03/26/2018

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies cast-in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes.

B. See Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for drainage fill under slabs-on-grade.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture.

C. Shop Drawings: For dimensions of concrete members, locations, and steel reinforcement.

D. Material test reports and/or certificates.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94 requirements for production facilities and equipment.

B. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents:

1. ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," Sections 1 through 5, and Sections 1 through 5 and Section 7 for "Lightweight Concrete."

2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials."

C. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FORM-FACING MATERIALS

A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints.

B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.

2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, grade 60, deformed.

Page 111: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 3 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE – 03300

Page 2

03/26/2018

B. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, plain, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets.

C. Deformed-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 497, flat sheet.

D. Galvanized-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, plain, fabricated from galvanized steel wire into flat sheets.

E. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."

2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source, throughout Project:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I, Supplement with the following:

a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or F. b. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120.

B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, graded, 1-inch nominal maximum coarse-aggregate size.

1. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.

C. Lightweight Aggregate: ASTM C 330, 1/2-inch nominal maximum aggregate size.

D. Water: ASTM C 94 and potable.

E. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.

F. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride.

1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A. 2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type B. 3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D. 4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type F. 5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type G. 6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017, Type II.

2.4 VAPOR RETARDERS

A. Plastic Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class A or B. Include manufacturer's recommended adhesive or pressure-sensitive tape.

Page 112: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 3 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE – 03300

Page 3

03/26/2018

B. Water Vapor Transmittance: ASTM E 154; maximum 0.1 perms (grains/(ft.sq.xhrxin.HG)).

2.5 WATERSTOPS

A. Flexible Rubber Waterstops: CE CRD-C 513, with factory-installed metal eyelets, for embedding in concrete to prevent passage of fluids through joints. Factory fabricate corners, intersections, and directional changes.

B. Chemically Resistant Flexible Waterstops: Thermoplastic elastomer rubber waterstops, for embedding in concrete to prevent passage of fluids through joints; resistant to oils, solvents, and chemicals. Factory fabricate corners, intersections, and directional changes.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. JP Specialties, Inc.; Earth Shield TPE-Rubber. b. Vinylex Corp.; PetroStop. c. WESTEC Barrier Technologies, Inc.; 600 Series TPE-R.

C. Flexible PVC Waterstops: CE CRD-C 572 for embedding in concrete to prevent passage of fluids through joints. Factory fabricate corners, intersections, and directional changes.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. BoMetals, Inc. b. Greenstreak. c. Paul Murphy Plastics Company. d. Vinylex Corp.

D. Self-Expanding Butyl Strip Waterstops: Manufactured rectangular or trapezoidal strip, butyl rubber with sodium bentonite or other hydrophilic polymers, for adhesive bonding to concrete, 3/4 by 1 inch.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing, Inc.; MiraSTOP. b. CETCO; Volclay Waterstop-RX. c. Concrete Sealants Inc.; Conseal CS-231. d. Greenstreak; Swellstop. e. Henry Company, Sealants Division; Hydro-Flex. f. JP Specialties, Inc.; Earth Shield Type 20.

E. Self-Expanding Rubber Strip Waterstops: Manufactured rectangular or trapezoidal strip, bentonite-free hydrophilic polymer modified chloroprene rubber, for adhesive bonding to concrete, 3/8 by 3/4 inch.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

Page 113: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 3 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE – 03300

Page 4

03/26/2018

a. Adeka Ultra Seal/OCM, Inc.; Adeka Ultra Seal. b. Greenstreak; Hydrotite. c. Vinylex Corp.; Swellseal.

2.6 CURING MATERIALS

A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete.

B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. when dry.

C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.

D. Water: Potable.

E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, dissipating.

F. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, nondissipating, certified by curing compound manufacturer to not interfere with bonding of floor covering.

G. Clear, Solvent-Borne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, Type 1, Class A.

H. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, Type 1, Class A.

2.7 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber.

2.8 CONCRETE MIXTURES

A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301.

B. Proportion normal-weight concrete and lightweight concrete mixture as follows:

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi (elevated slabs/columns/beams) and 3000 psi (all other concrete) at 28 days unless otherwise indicated on the plans and details.

2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.50 3. Slump Limit: 4 inches for concrete, plus or minus 1 inch . 4. Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 1-inch nominal

maximum aggregate size. 5. Air Content: Do not allow air content of troweled finished floors to exceed 3 percent.

Page 114: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 3 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE – 03300

Page 5

03/26/2018

2.9 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT

A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."

2.10 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94 and ASTM C 1116, and furnish batch ticket information.

1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FORMWORK

A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork according to ACI 301 to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support such loads.

B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.

C. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete.

3.2 EMBEDDED ITEMS

A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

3.3 VAPOR RETARDERS

A. Plastic Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair vapor retarders according to ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Lap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape.

3.4 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement.

1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete.

Page 115: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 3 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE – 03300

Page 6

03/26/2018

3.5 JOINTS

A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.

B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect.

C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least 1/3 of concrete thickness as follows:

1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces.

2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks.

D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated.

3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed.

B. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.

1. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301.

C. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1.

D. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301.

3.7 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES

A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities.

1. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view.

B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and

Page 116: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 3 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE – 03300

Page 7

03/26/2018

defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities.

1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view, to receive a rubbed finish.

C. Rubbed Finish: Apply the following to smooth-formed finished as-cast concrete where indicated:

1. Smooth-Rubbed Finish: Not later than one day after form removal, moisten concrete surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive until producing a uniform color and texture. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing process.

2. Grout-Cleaned Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply grout of a consistency of thick paint to coat surfaces and fill small holes. Mix one part portland cement to one and one-half parts fine sand with a 1:1 mixture of bonding admixture and water. Add white portland cement in amounts determined by trial patches so color of dry grout will match adjacent surfaces. Scrub grout into voids and remove excess grout. When grout whitens, rub surface with clean burlap and keep surface damp by fog spray for at least 36 hours.

3. Cork-Floated Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply a stiff grout. Mix one part portland cement and one part fine sand with a 1:1 mixture of bonding agent and water. Add white portland cement in amounts determined by trial patches so color of dry grout will match adjacent surfaces. Compress grout into voids by grinding surface. In a swirling motion, finish surface with a cork float.

D. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.

3.8 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS

A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.

B. Scratch Finish: While still plastic, texture concrete surface that has been screeded and bull-floated or darbied. Use stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes to produce a profile amplitude of 1/4 inch in 1 direction.

C. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture.

D. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings.

Page 117: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 3 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE – 03300

Page 8

03/26/2018

1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin-film-finish coating system

2. Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and an unleveled, freestanding, 10-foot long straightedge resting on 2 high spots and placed anywhere on the surface does not exceed 1/8 inch.

E. Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a first trowel finish to surfaces where ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed by either thickset or thin-set method. While concrete is still plastic, slightly scarify surface with a fine broom.

1. Comply with flatness and levelness tolerances for trowel finished floor surfaces.

F. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and ramps, and elsewhere as indicated.

3.9 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for hot-weather protection during curing.

B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.

C. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods:

1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days. 2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining

cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape.

3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

a. After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound manufacturer unless manufacturer certifies curing compound will not interfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project.

4. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

Page 118: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 3 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE – 03300

Page 9

03/26/2018

3.10 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS

A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval.

3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

1. Testing Services: Tests shall be performed according to ACI 301.

PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

A. A. No separate payment shall be made to the CONTRACTOR for the work described in this Section. Payments made under the lump sum shall be considered as full compensation for these requirements.

END OF SECTION

Page 119: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 5

STEEL & WELDING-05118

Page 1

03/26/2018

SECTION 05118 - STEEL & WELDING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Furnish steel indicated on the Drawings, specified herein, and/or needed for proper

completion of the Work.

B. Related work:

1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to,

General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these

Specifications.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01340.

B. Product data: Within 30 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's Notice

to Proceed, submit manufacturers’ data and installation instructions for proprietary materials

including form coatings, ties, and accessories, and manufactured form systems if used.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in

the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and

the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.

B. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with AWS "Standard

Qualification Procedures."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Rolled steel plates and bars: Comply with ASTM A 36.

B. Steel pipe: Comply with ASTM A53, type E or S, grade B and, where applicable, API-5L,

grade B.

C. Steel tube: Comply with ASTM A501.

D. Anchor bolts: Comply with ASTM A307, non-headed type with heavy hexagonal nuts

unless otherwise indicated.

E. Unfinished threaded fasteners:

1. Comply with ASTM A307, grade A, regular low carbon steel bolts and nuts.

2. Provide either hexagonal or square heads and nuts; except use only hexagonal units

for exposed connections.

Page 120: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 5

STEEL & WELDING-05118

Page 2

03/26/2018

F. High strength threaded fasteners: Provide heavy hexagonal structural bolts, heavy

hexagonal nuts, and hardened washers, all from quenched and tempered medium carbon

steel complying with ASTM A 325.

G. Primer: Use "10-99 Tnemec Primer," "Rustoleum No. 5769 Primer,” or equal, approved in

advance by the Architect.

H. Electrodes for welding Comply with AWS Code, using AWS A5.1 or A5.5 E70XX

electrodes.

2.2 FABRICATION

A. Connections:

1. Provide bolts and washers of types and sizes required for completion of field

erection.

2. Welded construction: Comply with AWS Code for procedures, appearance, and

quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welded work.

3. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods which will produce true alignment

of axes without warp.

B. Holes for other work:

1. Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel framing, and for

passage of other work through steel framing members, as shown on the approved

Shop Drawings.

2. Provide threaded nuts welded to framing, and other specialty items as shown, to

receive other work.

3. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to metal surfaces.

4. Do not flame cut holes or enlarge holes by burning.

5. Drill holes in bearing plates.

2.3 SHOP PAINTING

A. General:

1. Shop paint steel work, except those members or portions of members to be

embedded in concrete or mortar.

2. Paint embedded steel which is partially exposed on the exposed portions, and the

initial 2” of embedded areas only.

3. Do not paint surfaces which are to be welded or high-strength bolted with friction

type connections.

4. Apply two coats of paint to surfaces which are inaccessible after assembly or

erection. Change color of the second coat to distinguish it from the first.

B. Surface preparation:

1. After inspection and before shipping, clean steelwork to be painted.

2. Remove loose rust, loose mill scale, and spatter, slag, and flux deposits.

3. Clean steel in accordance with Steel Structures Painting Council SP-3, "Power Tool

Cleaning."

Page 121: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 5

STEEL & WELDING-05118

Page 3

03/26/2018

C. Painting:

1. Immediately after surface preparation, apply structural steel primer paint in

accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and at a rate to provide a

uniform dry film thickness.

2. Use painting methods which will result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges and

exposed surfaces.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FABRICATION

A. Comply with AISC specifications and "Code of Standard Practice," except as may be

modified herein.

B. Anchor bolts:

1. Provide anchor bolts and other connectors required for securing structural steel to

foundations and other in-place work.

2. Provide templates and other devices necessary for pre-setting bolts and anchors to

accurate locations.

C. Bases and bearing plates: Shop weld to columns and members attached to concrete.

D. Splicing:

1. Splice members only where indicated unless, with the LANDSCAPE

ARCHITECT's approval.

PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

A. No separate payment shall be made to the CONTRACTOR for the work described in this

Section. Such work shall be considered incidental to the project and the payments made under

lump sum shall be considered as full compensation for these requirements

END OF SECTION

Page 122: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 5

METAL FABRICATIONS GALVANIZED – 05501

Page 1

03/26/2018

SECTION 05501 - METAL FABRICATIONS GALVANIZED

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Provide miscellaneous metal work shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as

needed for a complete and proper installation.

B. Related work:

1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to,

General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these

Specifications.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01340.

B. Product data: Within 35 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's

Notice to Proceed, submit:

1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section;

2. Manufacturer’s specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the

specified requirements;

3. Shop Drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, installation, anchorage, and

interface of the work of this Section with the work of adjacent trades;

4. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures which, when approved by the

Landscape Architect, will become the basis for accepting or rejecting actual

installation procedures used on the Work

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in

the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and

the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.

B. Perform shop and/or field welding required in connection with the work of this Section in

strict accordance with pertinent recommendations of the American Welding Society.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01620.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. In fabricating items which will be exposed to view, limit materials to those which are free

from surface blemishes, pitting, rolled trade names, and roughness.

Page 123: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 5

METAL FABRICATIONS GALVANIZED – 05501

Page 2

03/26/2018

B. Comply with following standards, as pertinent.

1. Steel plates, shapes, and bars: ASTM A36; 2. Steel plates to be bent or cold-formed: ASTM A283, grade C; 3. Steel tubing (hot-formed, welded, or seamless): ASTM A50l; 4. Steel bars and bar-size shapes: ASTM A306, grade 65, or ASTM A36; 5. Cold-finished steel bars: ASTM A108; 6. Cold-rolled carbon steel sheets: ASTM A336; 7. Galvanizing: ASTM A123 / A123M - 09 Standard Specification for Zinc

(Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products, ASTM A526,

with G90 zinc coating in accordance with ASTM A525, ASTM A767 / A767M - 09 Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Bars for

8.

Concrete Reinforcement. Stainless steel sheets: AISI type 302 or 304, 24 gage, with number 4 finish;

9. Gray iron castings: ASTM A48, class 10; 10. Malleable iron castings: ASTM A47; 11. Steel pipe: ASTM A53, grade A, schedule 40, black finish unless otherwise noted; 12. Concrete inserts:

a. Threaded or wedge type galvanized ferrous castings of malleable iron

complying with ASTM A27;

b. Provide required bolts, shims, and washers, hot-dip galvanized in

accordance with ASTM A153.

2.2

FASTENERS

A. General:

1. For exterior use and where built into exterior walls, provide galvanized or stainless

steel fasteners.

2. Provide fasteners of type, grade, and class as specified on the plans.

B. Comply with following standards as pertinent.

1. Bolts and nuts: Provide hexagon-head regular type complying with ASTM A307,

grade A;

2. Lag bolts: Provide square-head type complying with Fed Spec FF-B-56l;

3. Machine screws: Provide cadmium plated steel type complying with Fed Spec FF-

S-111;

4. Washers:

a. Plain washers: Comply with Fed Spec FF-W-92, round, carbon steel;

b. Lock washers: Comply with Fed Spec FF-W-84, helical spring type carbon

steel;

5. Toggle bolts: Provide type, class, and style needed but complying with Fed Spec

FF-B-588;

6. Anchorage devices: Provide expansion shield complying with Fed Spec FF-S-325.

2.3 OTHER MATERIALS

A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper

installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Landscape

Architect.

Page 124: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 5

METAL FABRICATIONS GALVANIZED – 05501

Page 3

03/26/2018

2.4 GALVANIZING

A. All fabricated metal will have a galvanized finish and comply with the following:

1. ASTM A123 / A123M - 09 Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip

Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. 2. ASTM A526, with G90 zinc coating in accordance with ASTM A525.

3. ASTM A767 / A767M - 09 Standard Specifications for Zinc-Coated

(Galvanized) Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.

B. For repair of galvanizing, comply with the following:

1. ASTM A780 / A780M - 09 Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated

Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Except as otherwise shown on the Drawings or the approved Shop Drawings, use materials

of size, thickness, and type required to produce reasonable strength and durability in the

work of this Section.

B. Fabricate with accurate angles and surfaces which are true to the required lines and levels,

grinding exposed welds smooth and flush, forming exposed connections with hairline joints,

and using concealed fasteners wherever possible.

C. Fabricate with accurate angles and surfaces which are true to the required lines and levels.

Where surfaces abut or join provide a continuous butt weld along all edges. Grind exposed

welds smooth and flush.

D. Provide 3/16” dia. drilled weep holes where required for the galvanizing process.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS

A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.

Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not

proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

3.2 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in the

work of those trades for interface with the work of this Section.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General:

1. Set work accurately into position, plumb, level, true, and free from rack. 2. Anchor firmly into position.

3. No field welding will be allowed.

Page 125: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 5

METAL FABRICATIONS GALVANIZED – 05501

Page 4

03/26/2018

PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

A. No separate payment shall be made to the CONTRACTOR for the work described in this

Section. Payments made under the lump sum shall be considered as full compensation for

these requirements

END OF SECTION

Page 126: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 7

SEALANTS AND CAULKING-07920

Page 1

03/26/2018

SECTION 07920 - SEALANTS AND CAULKING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Throughout the work, seal and caulk joints where shown on the drawings and elsewhere as

required to provide a positive barrier against passage of moisture and passage of air.

B. Related work:

1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to,

General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these

Specifications.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with pertinent provisions of General Conditions, Divison 1.

B. Product data: Within 45 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's

Notification to Proceed, submit:

1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section;

2. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with

the specified requirements;

3. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures which, when approved by the

Engineer, will become the basis for accepting or rejecting actual installation

procedures used on the Work.

C. Samples: Upon request of the Engineer, submit Samples of each sealant, each backing

materials, each primer, and each bond breaker proposed to be used.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and

experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified

requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01620

B. Do not retain at the job site material which has exceeded the shelf life recommended by its

manufacturer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SEALANTS

A. Provide the following sealants, or equals approved in advance by the Engineer, where called

for on the Drawings or otherwise required for a complete and proper installation.

Page 127: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 7

SEALANTS AND CAULKING-07920

Page 2

03/26/2018

1. Sealant Type A:

a. Self-leveling, complying with ASTM C920-79, grade P, class 25

b. Acceptable products:

1) "Vulkem 45, one-part;"

2) "Vulkem 245, two-part;"

2. Sealant Type B:

a. Non-sag, complying with ASTM C920-79, type S, grade NS, class 25, use

NT, M, A, and 0

b. Acceptable products:

1) "Vulkem 116, one-part;"

2) "Vulkem 921, one-part;"

3. Sealant Type C:

a. Non-sag, complying with ASTM C920-79, type S, grade NS, class 25, use

NT, T, M, A, and 0

b. Acceptable products:

1) "Vulkem 227, two-part;"

2) "Vulkem 922, two-part;"

4. Sealant Type D:

a. Silicone (vertical surfaces only), complying with Fed Spec TT-S-

01543A, class A, low modulus;

b. Acceptable products:

1) "Dow Corning 790 Sanitary Sealant

5. Sealant Type E:

a. Acrylic latex, complying with ASTM C834-76

b. Acceptable products:

1) "Pecora AC 20"

B. For other services, provide products especially formulated for the proposed use and

approved in advance by the Engineer.

C. Colors:

1. Colors for each sealant installation will be selected by the Engineer from standard

colors normally available from the specified manufacturer.

2. Should such standard color not be available from an approved substitute

manufacturer except at additional charge, provide such colors at no additional cost

to the Owner.

3. In concealed installations, and in partially or fully exposed installations where so

approved by the Engineer, use standard gray or black sealant.

2.2 PRIMERS

A. Use only those primers which have been tested for durability on the surfaces to be sealed

and are specifically recommended for this installation by the manufacturer of the sealant

used.

2.3 BACKUP MATERIALS

A. Use only those backup materials which are non-absorbent, non-staining, and specifically

recommended for this installation by the manufacturer of the sealant used.

Page 128: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 7

SEALANTS AND CAULKING-07920

Page 3

03/26/2018

2.4 MASKING TAPE

A. For masking around joints, provide an appropriate masking tape which will effectively

prevent application of sealant on surfaces not scheduled to receive it, and which is

removable without damage to substrate.

2.5 OTHER MATERIALS

A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper

installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Engineer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS

A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.

Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not

proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Concrete and ceramic tile surfaces:

1. Install only on surfaces, which are dry, sound, and well brushed, wiping free from

dust.

2. At open joints, remove dust by mechanically blown compressed air if so required.

3. To remove oil and grease, use sandblasting or wire brushing.

4. Where surfaces have been treated, remove the surface treatment by sandblasting or

wire brushing.

5. Remove laitance and mortar from joint cavities.

B. Steel surfaces:

1. Steel surfaces in contact with sealant:

a. Sandblast as required to achieve acceptable surface for bond.

b. If sandblasting is not practical, or would damage adjacent finish, scrape the

metal or wire brush to remove mill scale and rust.

c. Use solvent to remove oil and grease, wiping the surfaces with clean white

rags only.

2. Remove protective coatings on steel by sandblasting or by using a solvent which

leaves no residue.

C. Aluminum surfaces:

1. Aluminum surfaces in contact with sealant:

a. Remove temporary protective coatings, dirt, oil, and grease.

b. When masking tape is used for protective cover, remove the tape just prior

to applying the sealant.

2. Use only such solvents to remove protective coatings as are recommended for that

purpose by the manufacturer of the aluminum work, and which are non-staining.

Page 129: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 7

SEALANTS AND CAULKING-07920

Page 4

03/26/2018

3.3 INSTALLATION OF BACKUP MATERIAL

A. When using backup of tube or rod stock, avoid lengthwise stretching of the material. Do

not twist or braid hose or rod backup stock.

B. Installation tool:

1. For installation of backup material, provide a blunt-surfaced tool of wood or plastic,

having shoulders designed to ride on the adjacent finished surface and a protrusion

of the required dimensions to assure uniform depth of backup material below the

sealant.

2. Do not, under any circumstance, use a screwdriver or similar tool for this purpose.

3. Using the approved tool, smoothly and uniformly place the backup material to the

depth indicated on the Drawings or otherwise required, compressing the backup

material 25% to 50% and securing a positive fit.

3.4 PRIMING

A. Use only the primer approved by the Engineer for the particular installation, applying in

strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations as approved by the Engineer.

3.5 BOND-BREAKER INSTALLATION

A. Provide an approved bond-breaker where recommended by the manufacturer of the sealant,

and where directed by the Engineer, adhering strictly to the manufacturers’ installation

recommendations.

3.6 INSTALLATION OF SEALANTS

A. Prior to start of installation in each joint, verify the joint type according to details on the

Drawings, or as otherwise directed by the Engineer, and verify that the required proportion

of width of joint to depth of joint has been secured.

B. Equipment:

1. Apply sealant under pressure with power-actuated handgun or manually operated

handgun, or by other appropriate means.

2. Use guns with nozzle of proper size, and providing sufficient pressure to completely

fill the joints as designed.

C. Thoroughly and completely mask joints where the appearance of primer or sealant on

adjacent surfaces would be objectionable.

D. Install the sealant in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations,

thoroughly filling joints to the recommended depth.

E. Tool joints to the profile shown on the Drawings, or as otherwise required if such profiles

are not shown on the Drawings.

1. Provide uniformly smooth joints with slightly concave surface.

Page 130: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 7

SEALANTS AND CAULKING-07920

Page 5

03/26/2018

2. Do not use tooling agent unless specifically so recommended in writing by the

manufacturer of the sealant.

F. Cleaning up:

1. Remove masking tape immediately after joints have been tooled.

2. Clean adjacent surfaces free from sealant as the installation progresses, using

solvent or cleaning agent recommended by the manufacturer of the sealant used.

3. Upon completion of the work of this Section, promptly remove from the job site all

debris, empty containers, and surplus material derived from this portion of the

Work.

PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

A. No separate payment shall be made to the CONTRACTOR for the work described in this

Section. Such work shall be considered incidental to the project and the payments made under

lump sum shall be considered as full compensation for these requirements

END OF SECTION

Page 131: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

3/26/2018

DIVISION 9

ANTI-GRAFFITI COATING - 09860 Page 1

 

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Provide all labor, materials, equipment and services to apply anti-graffiti coatings

on interior and/or exterior wall surfaces and elsewhere where noted or indicated on the Contract Drawings, as specified hereinafter and as needed for a complete and proper installation.

1.2. RELATED WORK

A. Painting in Section 09900.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with applicable provisions of SECTION 01330 of DIVISION 1 -

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS of these Specifications.

B. Product Data: Within 40 calendar days after the Contractor has received the City's "Notice to Proceed" submit the following:

1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section.

2. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with

the specified requirements.

3. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures which, when approved by the Landscape Architect will become the basis for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Labor: Use adequate numbers of skilled craft persons who are thoroughly trained

and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the Work of this Section.

B. Coordination with manufacturer: Contractor shall contact the manufacturer prior to bidding the Work so as to become familiarized with current costs, application procedures and notification requirements.

C. Job report: Applicator shall complete and file a "Job Report" with manufacturer

certifying conformance of application procedures and quantities to the manufacturer's requirements.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. General: Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01620 - STORAGE AND

PROTECTION DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS of these specifications.

Page 132: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

3/26/2018

DIVISION 9

ANTI-GRAFFITI COATING - 09860 Page 2

 

B. Delivery: Deliver materials to the job-site in unopened suitable packaging properly identified with the manufacturer's labels indicating manufacturer's name, product name and model number.

C. Storage: Store materials in a suitable location where directed by the Landscape

Architect in original unopened containers in compliance with manufacturer's printed instructions. Store in a location under cover, safe from weather and damage by construction operations.

D. Protection: Use all reasonable means necessary to protect materials before, during

and after installation. In the event of damage to specified items, immediately make necessary repairs and/or replacements to the full approval of the Landscape Architect, at no added cost to the City.

E. Inspect: Inspect for approval before containers are opened and any condemned

materials to be removed from the job-site.

1.6 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Warranty: Comply with provisions of the GENERAL CONDITIONS of these Specifications which shall include a 12-month warranty period which covers parts and labor; effective date of the warranty being the date of acceptance by the City.

B. Guarantee: The Contractor shall also furnish the City with a written guarantee, which

guaranties that during a period of two (2) years from the date of acceptance by the City the coating will not turn white, peel, chip or crack. The Contractor will without additional cost to the City, promptly make any repairs required as a result of ordinary wear and tear of the elements, and further guaranties that any defective material or Work shall be properly repaired or replaced without additional cost to the City.

C. Extra Stock of Materials: Upon completion of anti-graffiti coating application at

the job- site provide the City with 5 gallons of the anti-graffiti coating and 10 gallons of remover used on the project

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MATERIALS

A. Materials shall be the products of one manufacturer and be either the ones upon which the design is based on the products of the manufacturer approved in advance by the Landscape Architect in accordance with applicable conditions in the GENERAL CONDITIONS.

B. Material shall be the appropriate type as recommended by the manufacturers

(hereinafter named) or provide an equal product of another manufacturer approved in advance by the Landscape Architect.

Report Number as issued by the City of Los Angeles.

2.2 ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS

A. Subject to compliance with specified requirements, anti-graffiti coatings shall be

Page 133: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

3/26/2018

DIVISION 9

ANTI-GRAFFITI COATING - 09860 Page 3

 

one of the following products, "Or Equal:".

1. Evolution Surface Solutions – TruNano Graffiti Armor 2. SEI Chemical - Graffiti Proofer/Nano Based

2.3 MATERIAL PERFORMANCE CRITERIA

A. Completed graffiti protection shall include the following performance

criteria:

1. Shall have a flat non-glossy appearance.

2. Shall be non-yellowing and contain no waxes, urethane or other yellowing resins.

3. Shall cause little or no change in the appearance of the treated surface.

4. Shall allow moisture vapor transmission.

5. Can be non-sacrificial, permanent graffiti barrier.

6. Shall be renewable and repairable.

7. Be 100 % effective in removing all graffiti on masonry surfaces.

8. Dirt pickup shall be decreased by coating.

9. Manufacturer will warrant product performance.

10. Product shall be VOC compliant.

12. Product shall be capable by manufacturer's literature of withstanding 5 years

exterior exposure without significant loss of protection, other than spot restoration of areas attacked by graffiti, cleaned, and re-coated per written instructions of manufacturer.

13. Anti-graffiti treatment must be resistant to rain, weather, abrasion, peel,

ultra- violet, and be clear and non-yellowing.

14. Anti-graffiti treatment should be able to withstand repeated removal of all types of paint and other graffiti materials with little or no defacement of or change to the original surface.

B. Any submitted product must be applied to sample area and have the test listed under

"C" below performed.

C. After application of materials, a field demonstration or test will be performed to the satisfaction of City which will include:

1. Spray paint applied to material to simulate graffiti attack.

Page 134: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

3/26/2018

DIVISION 9

ANTI-GRAFFITI COATING - 09860 Page 4

 

2. Attack allowed to stand 14 days before removal.

3. Removal by manufacturer's recommended process shall determine that at least 98% of the graffiti has been removed.

D. Anti-Graffiti Locations:

1. Full height of all exterior exposed surfaces, excluding paving and roofs. 2. Include monument signs, interpretive signs, seating benches, tables, trash containers, ash urns, etc.

3. On all exterior steel doors and frames.

4. On all exterior wall mounted plaques and signs.

E. Per manufactures recommendations install surface sealant where recommended and at

rate recommended. 2.4 EQUIPMENT

A. All clear materials shall be applied by airless spray equipment per manufactures recommendations.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION OF CONDITIONS

A. Examine the areas and conditions on which materials of this Section will be applied.

Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed with contracted Work of this Section until such detrimental conditions are corrected. . All detrimental conditions shall be corrected as directed and approved by the Landscape Architect, before proceeding with Work of this Section. Start of installation operations shall imply Contractor’s acceptance of job conditions.

3.2 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

A. Do not proceed with application of anti-graffiti materials when the ambient temperature is less than 45 degrees F., when low temperature of 40 degrees F. or less is predicted within a period of 24 hours, or if rain is expected in the next 24 hours.

B. Do not apply materials in rainy conditions or within 5 days after surfaces have

become wet from rainfall or other moisture.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Preparation of Surface (As applicable):

1. Do not commence application until surface is structurally sound, clean, dry, and free from excess dust, loose paint, greasy stains and efflorescence.

Page 135: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

3/26/2018

DIVISION 9

ANTI-GRAFFITI COATING - 09860 Page 5

 

2. Form oils should be completely removed.

3. All cracks, voids, beeholes or mortar shrinkage shall be properly repaired

and primed if necessary to make the surface uniform.

4. Allow substrate to dry and age at least 3 weeks before applications of anti-graffiti coating.

5. Seal all porous surfaces as recommended by the manufacture a minimum of

48 hours before application of anti-graffiti coating material.

6. If using over a previously paint coated surface apply a small amount in an inconspicuous place to check for lifting.

7. Remove existing graffiti with graffiti remover or approval equal.

8. Applicator/Contractor to use the application tools and methods as

recommended by the coating manufacturer and approved by the Landscape Architect.

9. Applicator/Contractor is responsible for daily application of a small test

area on surface to be coated before starting daily general application to assure desired results, especially if there have been temperature changes during application.

B. Application of Anti-Graffiti Coating

1. Coverage: Apply materials at rate per square foot recommended by the

material manufacturer and agreed to by the Landscape Architect.

C. Protection: Applicator shall be responsible for protection of this and all adjacent Work from damage during application with drop cloths or other suitable materials.

D. Repairs: Any soiling of the Work of this Section shall be repaired by the installer

of the anti-graffiti material as approved by the Landscape Architect at no added cost to the City

E. Contractor shall carefully remove all protection materials from adjacent surfaces and

any residue resulting from this operation. Completely remove overspray and spills as soon as possible before curing and excess materials from the job-site.

F. Remove all excess materials, equipment, rubbish and debris from the job-site. All

areas in the library structure used by the Contractor to be left in a clean and safe condition.

END OF SECTION

Page 136: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 9

PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS) - 09912

Page 1

03/26/18

SECTION 09912 - PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS)

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of exposed exterior and

interior items and surfaces.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01340.

B. Product data: Within 35 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's

Notice to Proceed, submit:

1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section;

2. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance

with the specified requirements;

3. Product Data: For each product indicated.

4. Samples: For each type of finish-coat material indicated.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Benchmark Samples (Mockups): Provide a full-coat benchmark finish sample for each

type of coating and substrate required. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P5.

1. Wall Surfaces: Provide samples on at least 100 sq. ft.

2. Small Areas and Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.

3. Final approval of colors will be from benchmark samples.

1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a

minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F. Maintain storage containers in a clean

condition, free of foreign materials and residue.

B. Apply waterborne paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and

surrounding air are between 50 and 90 deg F.

C. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and

surrounding air are between 45 and 95 deg F.

D. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when relative humidity exceeds 85

percent; or at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet

surfaces.

Page 137: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 9

PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS) - 09912

Page 2

03/26/18

1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Extra materials may not be allowed for publicly funded projects.

B. Furnish extra paint materials from the same production run as the materials applied and in

the quantities described below. Package with protective covering for storage and identify

with labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to Owner.

1. Quantity: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. or 1 case, as appropriate, of each

material and color applied.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products listed in other Part 2

articles.

B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed in

other Part 2 articles.

C. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following

manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles:

1. Benjamin Moore & Co. (Benjamin Moore).

2. ICI Dulux Paint Centers (ICI Dulux Paints).

3. Kelly-Moore Paint Co. (Kelly-Moore).

4. Sherwin-Williams Co. (Sherwin-Williams).

2.2 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, and finish-coat materials that are

compatible with one another and with the substrates indicated under conditions of service

and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

B. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best-quality paint material of the various

coating types specified that are factory formulated and recommended by manufacturer for

application indicated. Paint-material containers not displaying manufacturer's product

identification will not be acceptable.

C. Colors: As selected from manufacturer's full range. Indicate paint colors in a separate

schedule or show location and extent on Drawings. The number of colors used on a

project and use of deep-tone colors will affect Project cost. See the Evaluations in

Division 9 Section "Painting."

Page 138: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 9

PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS) - 09912

Page 3

03/26/18

2.3 PREPARATORY COATS

A. Concrete Unit Masonry Block Filler: High-performance latex block filler of finish coat

manufacturer and recommended in writing by manufacturer for use with finish coat and

on substrate indicated.

B. Exterior Primer: Exterior alkyd or latex-based primer of finish coat manufacturer and

recommended in writing by manufacturer for use with finish coat and on substrate

indicated.

1. Ferrous-Metal and Aluminum Substrates: Rust-inhibitive metal primer.

2. Zinc-Coated Metal Substrates: Galvanized metal primer.

3. Where manufacturer does not recommend a separate primer formulation on

substrate indicated, use paint specified for finish coat.Revise below if alkyd

products are not allowed and coordinate with finish coats selected.

C. Interior Primer: Interior latex-based or alkyd primer of finish coat manufacturer and

recommended in writing by manufacturer for use with finish coat and on substrate

indicated.

1. Ferrous-Metal Substrates: Quick drying, rust-inhibitive metal primer.

2. Zinc-Coated Metal Substrates: Galvanized metal primer.

3. Where manufacturer does not recommend a separate primer formulation on

substrate indicated, use paint specified for finish coat.

2.4 EXTERIOR FINISH COATS

A. Exterior Flat Acrylic Paint:

1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Flat Latex House Paint No. 171.

2. ICI Dulux Paints; 2200-XXXX Dulux Professional Exterior 100 Percent Acrylic

Flat Finish.

3. Kelly-Moore; 1205 Color Shield Exterior Flat Acrylic House Paint.

4. Sherwin-Williams; A-100 Exterior Latex Flat House & Trim Paint A6 Series.

B. Exterior Low-Luster Acrylic Paint:

1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Low Lustre Latex House Paint No. 185.

2. ICI Dulux Paints; 2402-XXXX Dulux Professional Exterior 100 Percent Acrylic

Satin Finish.

3. Kelly-Moore; 1245 Acry-Velvet Exterior Low Sheen Acrylic Finish.

4. Waterborne Satin DTM Industrial Enamels.

5. Sherwin-Williams; A-100 Exterior Latex Satin House & Trim Paint A82 Series.

C. Exterior Semigloss Acrylic Enamel:

1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Latex House & Trim Paint No. 170.

2. ICI Dulux Paints; 2406-XXXX Dulux Professional Exterior 100 Percent Acrylic

Semi-Gloss Finish.

3. Kelly-Moore; 1250 Acry-Lustre Exterior Semi-Gloss Acrylic Finish.

4. Sherwin-Williams; A-100 Latex Gloss A8 Series.

D. Exterior Full-Gloss Acrylic Enamel for Concrete, Masonry, and Wood:

1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's IMC Acrylic Gloss Enamel M28.

Page 139: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 9

PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS) - 09912

Page 4

03/26/18

2. ICI Dulux Paints; 3028-XXXX Dulux Interior/Exterior Acrylic Gloss Finish.

3. Kelly-Moore; 1780 Kel-Guard Acrylic Gloss Enamel.

4. Sherwin-Williams; SuperPaint Exterior High Gloss Latex Enamel A85 Series.

E. Exterior Full-Gloss Acrylic Enamel for Ferrous and Other Metals:

1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's IMC Acrylic Gloss Enamel M28.

2. ICI Dulux Paints; 3028-XXXX Dulux Interior/Exterior Acrylic Gloss Finish.

3. Kelly-Moore; 5780 DTM Acrylic Gloss Enamel.

4. Sherwin-Williams; DTM Acrylic Coating Gloss (Waterborne) B66W100 Series.

F. Exterior Full-Gloss Alkyd Enamel:

1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's IMC Urethane Alkyd Enamel M22.

2. ICI Dulux Paints; 4308-XXXX Devguard Alkyd Industrial Gloss Enamel.

3. Kelly-Moore; 1700 Kel-Guard Gloss Alkyd Rust Inhibitive Enamel.

4. Sherwin-Williams; Industrial Enamel B-54 Series.

2.5 INTERIOR FINISH COATS

A. Interior Flat Acrylic Paint:

1. Benjamin Moore; Moorecraft Super Spec Latex Flat No. 275.

2. ICI Dulux Paints; 1200-XXXX Dulux Professional Velvet Matte Interior Flat

Latex Wall & Trim Finish.

3. Kelly-Moore; 450 Pro-Wall Interior Flat Latex Wall Paint.

4. Sherwin-Williams; ProMar 200 Interior Latex Flat Wall Paint B30W200 Series.

B. Interior Flat Latex-Emulsion Size:

1. Benjamin Moore; Moorecraft Super Spec Latex Flat No. 275.

2. ICI Dulux Paints; 1200-XXXX Dulux Professional Velvet Matte Interior Flat

Latex Wall & Trim Finish.

3. Kelly-Moore; 450 Pro-Wall Interior Flat Latex Wall Paint.

4. Sherwin-Williams; ProMar 200 Interior Latex Flat Wall Paint B30W200 Series.

C. Interior Semigloss Acrylic Enamel:

1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel No. 276.

2. ICI Dulux Paints; 1406-XXXX Dulux Professional Acrylic Semi-Gloss Interior

Wall & Trim Enamel.

3. Kelly-Moore; 1649 Acrylic-Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel.

4. Sherwin-Williams; ProMar 200 Interior Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel

B31W200 Series.

2.6 INTERIOR WOOD STAINS AND VARNISHES

A. Interior Wood Stain: Alkyd based.

1. Benjamin Moore; Benwood Penetrating Stain No. 234.

2. ICI Dulux Paints; 1700-XXX WoodPride Interior Solventborne Wood Finishing

Stain.

3. Kelly-Moore; McCloskey Stain.

4. Sherwin-Williams; Wood Classics Interior Oil Stain A-48 Series.

Page 140: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 9

PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS) - 09912

Page 5

03/26/18

B. Clear Sanding Sealer: Fast-drying alkyd based.

1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's Interior Wood Finishes Quick-Dry Sanding Sealer

No. 413.

2. ICI Dulux Paints; 1902-0000 WoodPride Interior Satin Polyurethane Varnish.

3. Kelly-Moore; 2164 E Z Sand Alkyd Q. D. Sealer.

4. Sherwin-Williams; Wood Classics Fast Dry Sanding Sealer B26V43.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with

requirements for paint application.

B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure

compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information

on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers.

C. Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures,

and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or

impossible because of size or weight of the item, provide surface-applied protection

before surface preparation and painting.

1. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items

removed using workers skilled in the trades involved.

D. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to

manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as

specified.

1. Coordination of shop-applied primers with finish coats is critical. If

compatibility problems develop, it may be necessary to provide barrier coats over

shop-applied primers or to remove the primer and reprime the substrate.

2. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime.

3. Cementitious Materials: Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and

release agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers

have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of surface

preparation.

4. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers,

mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view

smooth and dust off.

a. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat of

white shellac or other recommended knot sealer before applying primer.

After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty

or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried.

b. Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately on delivery. Prime

edges, ends, faces, undersides, and back sides of wood, including

cabinets, counters, cases, and paneling.

c. If transparent finish is required, backprime with spar varnish.

Page 141: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 9

PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS) - 09912

Page 6

03/26/18

d. Backprime paneling on interior partitions where masonry, plaster, or

other wet wall construction occurs on backside.

e. Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy

coat of varnish or sealer immediately on delivery.

5. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not been

shop coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign

substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with

SSPC's recommendations.

a. Blast steel surfaces clean as recommended by paint system manufacturer

and according to SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3.

b. Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment

wash coat before priming.

c. Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been

damaged. Wire-brush, clean with solvents recommended by paint

manufacturer, and touch up with same primer as the shop coat.

6. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum-based

solvents so surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment

from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods.

E. Material Preparation:

1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free

of foreign materials and residue.

2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as

required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary,

remove surface film and strain material before using.

F. Exposed Surfaces: Include areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, grilles,

convector covers, covers for finned-tube radiation, and similar components are in place.

Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain system integrity and provide

desired protection.

1. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar

exposed surfaces. Before final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind

permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only.

2. Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, nonspecular black paint where visible

through registers or grilles.

3. Paint backsides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match

exposed surfaces.

4. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as exterior faces.

5. Finish interior of wall and base cabinets and similar field-finished casework to

match exterior.

G. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat.

H. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or

otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before

subsequent surface deterioration.

1. Omit primer over metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup

painted.

Page 142: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 9

PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS) - 09912

Page 7

03/26/18

2. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply

additional coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance.

I. Revise first paragraph below if the use of spray equipment for paint application is limited

or restricted. Some owners prohibit or restrict the use of spray on their projects. Spray

application of paints can damage sensitive electronic operating equipment and might

cause problems for personnel in occupied buildings.

J. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other

applicators according to manufacturer's written instructions.

K. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's

recommended spreading rate. Provide total dry film thickness of the entire system as

recommended by manufacturer.

L. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to

items exposed in equipment rooms and occupied spaces.

M. Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete masonry block at a rate to ensure complete

coverage with pores filled.

N. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat, as recommended by

manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been

prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction

spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn-through

or other defects due to insufficient sealing.

O. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a

smooth, opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness,

spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections

will not be acceptable.

P. Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce a glass-smooth surface film

of even luster. Provide a finish free of laps, runs, cloudiness, color irregularity, brush

marks, orange peel, nail holes, or other surface imperfections.

Q. Stipple Enamel Finish: Roll and redistribute paint to an even and fine texture. Leave no

evidence of rolling, such as laps, irregularity in texture, skid marks, or other surface

imperfections.

3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTING

A. At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint

materials from Project site.

B. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage from painting.

Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by

Architect.

Page 143: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 9

PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS) - 09912

Page 8

03/26/18

C. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. After completing painting

operations, remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their

work.

1. After work of other trades is complete, touch up and restore damaged or defaced

painted surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P1.

3.3 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE

A. Concrete, Stucco, and Masonry (Other Than Concrete Unit Masonry):

1. Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.

a. Primer: Exterior concrete and masonry primer.

b. Finish Coats: Exterior low-luster acrylic paint.

B. Concrete Unit Masonry:

1. Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a block filler.

a. Block Filler: Concrete unit masonry block filler.

b. Finish Coats: Exterior low-luster acrylic paint.

C. Mineral-Fiber-Reinforced Cement Panels:

1. Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.

a. Primer: Exterior concrete and masonry primer.

b. Finish Coats: Exterior flat acrylic paint.

D. Smooth Wood:

1. Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.

a. Primer: Exterior wood primer for acrylic enamels.

b. Finish Coats: Exterior low-luster acrylic paint.

E. Wood Trim:

1. Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.

a. Primer: Exterior wood primer for acrylic enamels.

b. Finish Coats: Exterior semi-gloss acrylic enamel.

F. Plywood:

1. Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.

a. Primer: Exterior wood primer for acrylic enamels.

b. Finish Coats: Exterior low-luster acrylic paint.

G. Ferrous Metal:

1. Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a rust-inhibitive primer.

a. Primer: Exterior ferrous-metal primer (not required on shop-primed

items).

b. Finish Coats: Exterior low-luster acrylic paint.

H. Zinc-Coated Metal:

1. Acrylic Finish: One finish coat over a galvanized metal primer.

a. Primer: Exterior galvanized metal primer.

b. Finish Coats: Exterior low-luster acrylic paint.

Page 144: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 9

PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS) - 09912

Page 9

03/26/18

I. Aluminum:

1. Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.

a. Primer: Exterior aluminum primer under acrylic finishes.

b. Finish Coats: Exterior semi-gloss acrylic enamel.

3.4 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE

A. Concrete and Masonry (Other Than Concrete Unit Masonry):

1. Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.

a. Primer: Interior concrete and masonry primer.

b. Finish Coats: Interior low-luster acrylic enamel.

B. Concrete Unit Masonry:

1. Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a block filler.

a. Block Filler: Concrete unit masonry block filler.

b. Finish Coats: Interior low-luster acrylic enamel.

C. Mineral-Fiber-Reinforced Cement Panels:

1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats.

a. Finish Coats: Interior flat acrylic paint.

D. Gypsum Board:

1. Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.

a. Primer: Interior gypsum board primer.

b. Finish Coats: Interior low-luster acrylic enamel.

E. Plaster:

1. Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.

a. Primer: Interior plaster primer.

b. Finish Coats: Interior.

F. Wood and Hardboard:

1. Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.

a. Primer: Interior wood primer for acrylic-enamel and semi-gloss alkyd-

enamel finishes.

b. Finish Coats: Interior low-luster acrylic enamel.

G. Ferrous Metal:

1. Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.

a. Primer: Interior ferrous-metal primer.

b. Finish Coats: Interior low-luster acrylic enamel.

H. Zinc-Coated Metal:

1. Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.

a. Primer: Interior zinc-coated metal primer.

b. Finish Coats: Interior low-luster acrylic enamel.

Page 145: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

DIVISION 9

PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS) - 09912

Page 10

03/26/18

3.5 INTERIOR STAIN AND NATURAL-FINISH WOODWORK SCHEDULE

A. Stain-Varnish Finish: Two finish coats of varnish over a sealer coat and interior wood

stain. Wipe wood filler before applying stain.

1. Filler Coat: Open-grain wood filler.

2. Stain Coat: Interior wood stain.

3. Sealer Coat: Clear sanding sealer.

4. Finish Coats: Interior alkyd- or polyurethane-based clear satin varnish.

PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

A. No separate payment shall be made to the CONTRACTOR for the work described in this

Section. Such work shall be considered incidental to the project and the payments made

under lump sum shall be considered as full compensation for these requirements

END OF SECTION

Page 146: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

16050 - 1 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 3/11

SECTION 16050 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all

Work herein. B. The Contract Drawings indicate the extent and general arrangement of the systems. If

any departure from the Contract Drawings are deemed necessary by the Contractor, details of such departures and the reasons therefore, shall be submitted to the Architect for approval as soon as practicable. No such departures shall be made without the prior written approval of the Architect.

1.02 SCOPE OF WORK

A. The Work included under this Contract consists of the furnishing and installation of all

equipment and material necessary and required to form the complete and functioning systems in all of its various phases, all as shown on the accompanying Drawings and/or described in these Specifications. The contractor shall review all pertinent drawings, including those of other contracts prior to commencement of Work.

B. This Division requires the furnishing and installing of all items Specified herein, indicated

on the Drawings or reasonably inferred as necessary for safe and proper operation; including every article, device or accessory (whether or not specifically called for by item) reasonably necessary to facilitate each system's functioning as indicated by the design and the equipment specified. Elements of the work include, but are not limited to, materials, labor, supervision, transportation, storage, equipment, utilities, all required permits, licenses and inspections. All work performed under this Section shall be in accordance with the Project Manual, Drawings and Specifications and is subject to the terms and conditions of the Contract.

C. The approximate locations of Electrical items are indicated on the Drawings. These

Drawings are not intended to give complete and accurate details in regard to location of outlets, apparatus, etc. Exact locations are to be determined by actual measurements at the building, and will in all cases be subject to the Review of the Owner or Engineer, who reserves the right to make any reasonable changes in the locations indicated without additional cost to the Owner.

D. Items specifically mentioned in the Specifications but not shown on the Drawings and/or

items shown on Drawings but not specifically mentioned in the Specifications shall be installed by the Contractor under the appropriate section of work as if they were both specified and shown.

E. All discrepancies between the Contract Documents and actual job-site conditions shall be

reported to the Owner or Engineer so that they will be resolved prior to the bidding, where this cannot be done at least 7 working days prior to bid; the greater or more costly of the discrepancy shall be bid. All labor and materials required to perform the work described shall be included as part of this Contract.

F. It is the intention of this Section of the Specifications to outline minimum requirements to

furnish the Owner with a turn-key and fully operating system in cooperation with other trades.

G. It is the intent of the above "Scope" to give the Contractor a general outline of the extent

of the Work involved; however, it is not intended to include each and every item required

Page 147: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

16050 - 2 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 3/11

for the Work. Anything omitted from the "Scope" but shown on the Drawings, or specified later or necessary for a complete and functioning heating, ventilating and air conditioning system shall be considered a part of the overall "Scope".

H. The Contractor shall rough-in fixtures and equipment furnished by others from rough-in

and placement drawings furnished by others. The Contractor shall make final connection to fixtures and equipment furnished by others.

I. Contractor shall participate in the commissioning process; including but not limited to

meeting attendance, completion of checklists and participation in functional testing. 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS

A. General Conditions B. Supplementary Conditions C. Division 1

1.04 COOPERATION WITH TRADES:

A. Cooperation with trades of adjacent, related, or affected materials or operations shall be considered a part of this work in order to affect timely and accurate placing of work and bring together in proper and correct sequence, the work of such trades.

1.05 REFERENCES

A. National Electrical Code (NEC) B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) C. Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. (UL) D. Insulated Cable Engineer's Association (ICEA). E. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA). F. Institute of Electrical and Electronic's Engineers (IEEE). G. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). H. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).

I. International Energy Conservation Code (IECC).

1.06 COMPLETE FUNCTIONING OF WORK:

A. All work fairly implied as essential to the complete functioning of the electrical systems shown on the Drawings and Specifications shall be completed as part of the work of this Division unless specifically stated otherwise. It is the intention of the Drawings and Specifications to establish the types of the systems, but not set forth each item essential to the functioning of the system. In case of doubt as to the work intended, or in the event of amplification or clarification thereof, the Contractor shall call upon the Architect for supplementary instructions, Drawings, etc.

B. Contractor shall review all pertinent Drawings and adjust his work to all conditions shown

Page 148: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

16050 - 3 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 3/11

there on. Discrepancies between Plans, Specifications, and actual field conditions shall be brought to the prompt attention of the Architect.

1. Approximate location of transformers, feeders, branch circuits, outlets, lighting

and power panels, outlets for special systems, etc., are indicated on the Drawings. However, the Drawings, do not give complete and accurate detailed locations of such outlets, conduit runs, etc., and exact locations must be determined by actual field measurement. Such locations will, at all times, be subject to the approval of the Architect.

2. Communicate with the Architect and secure his approval of any outlet (light fixture, receptacle, switch, etc.) location about which there may be the least question. Outlets obviously placed in a location not suitable to the finished room or without specific approval, shall be removed and relocated when so directed by the Architect. Location of light fixtures shall be coordinated with reflected ceiling plans.

C. Additional coordination with mechanical contractor may be required to allow adequate

clearances of mechanical equipment, fixtures and associated appurtenances. Contractor to notify Architect and Engineer of unresolved clearances, conflicts or equipment locations.

1.07 SCHEMATIC NATURE OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. The contract documents are schematic in nature in that they are only to establish scope and a minimum level of quality. They are not to be used as actual working construction drawings. The actual working construction drawings shall be the approved shop drawings.

1.08 CONTRACTOR’S QUALIFICATIONS

A. An approved contractor for the work under this Division shall be:

1. A specialist in this field and have the personnel, experience, training, and skill, and the organization to provide a practical working system.

2. Able to furnish evidence of having contracted for and installed not less than 3 systems of comparable size and type that have served their Owners satisfactorily for not less than 3 years.

3. Perform work by persons qualified to produce workmanship of specified quality. Persons performing electrical work shall be required to be licensed. Onsite supervision, journeyman shall have minimum of journeyman license. Helpers, apprentices shall have minimum of apprentice license.

1.09 DATE OF FINAL ACCEPTANCE

A. The date of final acceptance shall be the date of owner occupancy, or the date all punch list items have been completed or final payment has been received. Refer to Division 1 for additional requirements.

B. The date of final acceptance shall be documented in writing and signed by the architect,

owner and contractor.

1.10 DEFINITIONS AND SYMBOLS

Page 149: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

16050 - 4 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 3/11

A. General Explanation: A substantial amount of construction and Specification language constitutes definitions for terms found in other Contract Documents, including Drawings which must be recognized as diagrammatic and schematic in nature and not completely descriptive of requirements indicated thereon. Certain terms used in Contract Documents are defined generally in this article, unless defined otherwise in Division 1.

B. Definitions and explanations of this Section are not necessarily either complete or

exclusive, but are general for work to the extent not stated more explicitly in another provision of the Contract Documents.

C. Indicated: The term "Indicated" is a cross-reference to details, notes or schedules on the

Drawings, to other paragraphs or schedules in the Specifications and to similar means of recording requirements in Contract Documents. Where such terms as "Shown", "Noted", "Scheduled", "Specified" and "Detailed" are used in lieu of "Indicated", it is for the purpose of helping the reader locate cross-reference material, and no limitation of location is intended except as specifically shown.

D. Directed: Where not otherwise explained, terms such as "Directed", "Requested",

"Accepted", and "Permitted" mean by the Architect or Engineer. However, no such implied meaning will be interpreted to extend the Architect's or Engineer's responsibility into the Contractor's area of construction supervision.

E. Reviewed: Where used in conjunction with the Engineer's response to submittals,

requests for information, applications, inquiries, reports and claims by the Contractor the meaning of the term "Reviewed" will be held to limitations of Architect's and Engineer's responsibilities and duties as specified in the General and Supplemental Conditions. In no case will "Reviewed" by Engineer be interpreted as a release of the Contractor from responsibility to fulfill the terms and requirements of the Contract Documents.

F. Furnish: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail, the term "Furnish" is used to mean

supply and deliver to the project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, etc., as applicable in each instance.

G. Install: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail, the term "Install" is used to describe

operations at the project site including unloading, unpacking, assembly, erection, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protection, cleaning and similar operations, as applicable in each instance.

H. Provide: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail, the term "Provide" is used to mean

"Furnish and Install", complete and ready for intended use, as applicable in each instance.

I. Installer: Entity (person or firm) engaged by the Contractor or its subcontractor or Sub-contractor for performance of a particular unit of work at the project site, including unloading, unpacking, assembly, erection, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protection, cleaning and similar operations, as applicable in each instance. It is a general requirement that such entities (Installers) be expert in the operations they are engaged to perform.

J. Imperative Language: Used generally in Specifications. Except as otherwise indicated,

requirements expressed imperatively are to be performed by the Contractor. For clarity of reading at certain locations, contrasting subjective language is used to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by the Contractor, or when so noted by other identified installers or entities.

K. Minimum Quality/Quantity: In every instance, the quality level or quantity shown or

specified is intended as minimum quality level or quantity of work to be performed or

Page 150: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

16050 - 5 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 3/11

provided. Except as otherwise specifically indicated, the actual work may either comply exactly with that minimum (within specified tolerances), or may exceed that minimum within reasonable tolerance limits. In complying with requirements, indicated or scheduled numeric values are either minimums or maximums as noted or as appropriate for the context of the requirements. Refer instances of uncertainty to Owner or Engineer via a request for information (RFI) for decision before proceeding.

L. Abbreviations and Symbols: The language of Specifications and other Contract

Documents including Drawings is of an abbreviated type in certain instances, and implies words and meanings which will be appropriately interpreted. Actual word abbreviations of a self explanatory nature have been included in text of Specifications and Drawings. Specific abbreviations and symbols have been established, principally for lengthy technical terminology and primarily in conjunction with coordination of Specification requirements with notations on Drawings and in Schedules. These are frequently defined in Section at first instance of use or on a Legend and Symbol Drawing. Trade and industry association names and titles of generally recognized industry standards are frequently abbreviated. Singular words will be interpreted as plural and plural words will be interpreted as singular where applicable and where full context of Contract Documents so indicate. Except as otherwise indicated, graphic symbols and abbreviations used on Drawings and in Specifications are those recognized in construction industry for indicated purposes. Where not otherwise noted symbols and abbreviations are defined by 1993 ASHRAE Fundamentals Handbook, chapter 34 "Abbreviations and Symbols", ASME and ASPE published standards.

1.11 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver products to the project properly identified with names, model numbers, types, grades, compliance labels, and other information needed for identification.

B. Deliver products to the project at such time as the project is ready to receive the

equipment, pipe or duct properly protected from incidental damage and weather damage.

C. Damaged equipment shall be promptly removed from the site and new, undamaged equipment shall be installed in its place promptly with no additional charge to the Owner.

1.12 SUBMITTALS

A. Coordinate with Division 1 for submittal timetable requirements, unless noted otherwise within thirty (30) days after the Contract is awarded the Contractor shall submit a minimum of eight (8) complete bound sets of shop drawings and complete data covering each item of equipment or material. The first submittal of each item requiring a submittal must be received by the Architect or Engineer within the above thirty day period. The Architect or Engineer shall not be responsible for any delays or costs incurred due to excessive shop drawing review time for submittals received after the thirty (30) day time limit. The Architect and Engineer will retain one (1) copy each of all shop drawings for their files. Where full size drawings are involved, submit one (1) print and one (1) reproducible sepia or vellum in lieu of eight (8) sets. All literature pertaining to an item subject to Shop Drawing submittal shall be submitted at one time. A submittal shall not contain information from more than one Specification section, but may have a section subdivided into items or equipment as listed in each section. The Contractor may elect to submit each item or type of equipment separately. Each submittal shall include the following items enclosed in a suitable binder: 1. A cover sheet with the names and addresses of the Project, Architect, MEP

Engineer, General Contractor and the Subcontractor making the submittal. The

Page 151: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

16050 - 6 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 3/11

cover sheet shall also contain the section number covering the item or items submitted and the item nomenclature or description.

2. An index page with a listing of all data included in the Submittal. 3. A list of variations page with a listing all variations, including unfurnished or

additional required accessories, items or other features, between the submitted equipment and the specified equipment. If there are no variations, then this page shall state "NO VARIATIONS". Where variations affect the work of other Contractors, then the Contractor shall certify on this page that these variations have been fully coordinated with the affected Contractors and that all expenses associated with the variations will be paid by the submitting Contractor. This page will be signed by the submitting Contractor.

4. Equipment information including manufacturer's name and designation, size, performance and capacity data as applicable. All applicable Listings, Labels, Approvals and Standards shall be clearly indicated.

5. Dimensional data and scaled drawings as applicable to show that the submitted equipment will fit the space available with all required Code and maintenance clearances clearly indicated and labeled at a minimum scale of 1/4" = 1'-0", as required to demonstrate that the alternate or substituted product will fit in the space available.

6. Identification of each item of material or equipment matching that indicated on the Drawings.

7. Sufficient pictorial, descriptive and diagrammatic data on each item to show its conformance with the Drawings and Specifications. Any options or special requirements or accessories shall be so indicated. All applicable information shall be clearly indicated with arrows or another approved method.

8. Additional information as required in other Sections of this Division. 9. Certification by the General Contractor and Subcontractor that the material

submitted is in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications, signed and dated in long hand. Submittals that do not comply with the above requirements shall be returned to the Contractor and shall be marked "REVISE AND RESUBMIT".

B. Refer to Division 1 for additional information on shop drawings and submittals.

C. Equipment and materials submittals and shop drawings will be reviewed for compliance

with design concept only. It will be assumed that the submitting Contractor has verified that all items submitted can be installed in the space allotted. Review of shop drawings and submittals shall not be considered as a verification or guarantee of measurements or building conditions.

D. Where shop drawings and submittals are marked "REVIEWED", the review of the

submittal does not indicate that submittals have been checked in detail nor does it in any way relieve the Contractor from his responsibility to furnish material and perform work as required by the Contract Documents.

E. Shop drawings shall be reviewed and returned to the Contractor with one of the following

categories indicated: 1. REVIEWED: Contractor need take no further submittal action, shall include this

submittal in the O&M manual and may order the equipment submitted on. 2. REVIEWED AS NOTED: Contractor shall submit a letter verifying that required

exceptions to the submittal have been received and complied with including additional accessories or coordination action as noted, and shall include this submittal and compliance letter in the O&M manual. The contractor may order

Page 152: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

16050 - 7 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 3/11

the equipment submitted on at the time of the returned submittal providing the Contractor complies with the exceptions noted.

3. NOT APPROVED: Contractor shall resubmit new submittal on material, equipment or method of installation when the alternate or substitute is not approved, the Contractor will automatically be required to furnish the product, material or method named in the Specifications and/or drawings. Contractor shall not order equipment that is not approved. Repetitive requests for substitutions will not be considered.

4. REVISE AND RESUBMIT: Contractor shall resubmit new submittal on material, equipment or method of installation when the alternate or substitute is marked revise and resubmit, the Contractor will automatically be required to furnish the product, material or method named in the Specifications and/or provide as noted on previous shop drawings. Contractor shall not order equipment marked revise and resubmit. Repetitive requests for substitutions will not be considered.

5. CONTRACTOR’S CERTIFICATION REQUIRED: Contractor shall resubmit submittal on material, equipment or method of installation. The Contractor’s stamp is required stating the submittal meets all conditions of the contract documents. The stamp shall be signed by the General Contractor. The submittal will not be reviewed if the stamp is not placed and signed on all shop drawings.

6. MANUFACTURER NOT AS SPECIFIED: Contractor shall resubmit new submittal on material, equipment or method of installation when the alternate or substitute is marked manufacturer not as specified, the Contractor will automatically be required to furnish the product, material or method named in the specifications. Contractor shall not order equipment where submittal is marked manufacturer not as specified. Repetitive requests for substitutions will not be considered.

F. Materials and equipment which are purchased or installed without shop drawing review

shall be at the risk of the Contractor and the cost for removal and replacement of such materials and equipment and related work which is judged unsatisfactory by the Owner or Engineer for any reason shall be at the expense of the Contractor. The responsible Contractor shall remove the material and equipment noted above and replace with specified equipment or material at his own expense when directed in writing by the Architect or Engineer.

G. Shop Drawing Submittals shall be complete and checked prior to submission to the Engineer for review.

H. Furnish detailed shop drawings, descriptive literature, physical data and a specification critique for each section indicating "compliance" and/or "variations" for the following items:

Lighting Fixtures Lighting Contactors Time Clocks Lighting Control System Photocells Wire

I. Refer to each specification section for additional requirements.

1.13 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Prepare maintenance manuals in accordance with Division 1 and in addition to the requirements specified in Division 1, include the following information for equipment items:

Page 153: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

16050 - 8 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 3/11

1. Description of function, normal operating characteristics and limitations,

performance curves, engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and commercial numbers of replacement parts.

2. Manufacturer's printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in, and routine and normal operating instructions; regulation, control, stopping, shutdown, and emergency instructions; and summer and winter operating instructions.

3. Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and troubleshooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly; aligning and adjusting instructions.

4. Servicing instructions and lubrication charts and schedules.

1.14 COORDINATION DRAWINGS

A. Prepare coordination drawings to a scale of 1/4"=1'-0" or larger; detailing major elements, components, and systems of mechanical equipment and materials in relationship with other systems, installations, and building components. Indicate locations where space is limited for installation and access and where sequencing and coordination of installations are of importance to the efficient flow of the Work, including (but not necessarily limited to) the following:

1. Indicate the proposed locations of pipe, duct, equipment, and other materials.

Include the following: a. Wall and type locations. b. Clearances for installing and maintaining insulation. c. Locations of light fixtures and sprinkler heads. d. Clearances for servicing and maintaining equipment, including tube

removal, filter removal, and space for equipment disassembly required for periodic maintenance.

e. Equipment connections and support details. f. Exterior wall and foundation penetrations. g. Routing of storm and sanitary sewer piping. h. Fire-rated wall and floor penetrations. i. Sizes and location of required concrete pads and bases. j. Valve stem movement. k. Structural floor, wall and roof opening sizes and details.

2. Indicate scheduling, sequencing, movement, and positioning of large equipment into the building during construction.

3. Prepare floor plans, elevations, and details to indicate penetrations in floors, walls, and ceilings and their relationship to other penetrations and installations.

4. Prepare reflected ceiling plans to coordinate and integrate installations, air distribution devices, light fixtures, communication systems components, and other ceiling-mounted items.

B. This Contractor shall be responsible for coordination of all items that will affect the

installation of the work of this Division. This coordination shall include, but not be limited to: voltage, ampacity, capacity, electrical and piping connections, space requirements, sequence of construction, building requirements and special conditions.

C. By submitting shop drawings on the project, this Contractor is indicating that all necessary

coordination has been completed and that the systems, products and equipment submitted can be installed in the building and will operate as specified and intended, in full coordination with all other Contractors and Subcontractors.

1.15 RECORD DRAWINGS

Page 154: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

16050 - 9 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 3/11

1. Maintain a continuous record during the course of construction of all changes and deviations in the work from the contract drawings. Upon completion of the work, purchase a set of "Auto Positive Tracings" on vellum and make corrections as required to reflect the electrical systems as installed. Location and size of all conduit shall be accurately shown to dimension. Submit three prints of the tracings for approval. Make corrections to tracings as directed and deliver "Auto Positive Tracings" to the Architect. Record drawings shall be furnished in addition to shop drawings. Symbols on the Record drawings shall correspond to the identification symbols on the contract drawings and equipment identification plates and tags.

2. The Contractor shall maintain a set of clearly marked black line record "AS-BUILT" prints

on the job site on which he shall mark all work details, alterations to meet site conditions and changes made by "Change Order" notices. These shall be kept available for inspection by the Owner, Architect or Engineer at all times.

3. Refer to Division 1 for additional requirements concerning record drawings. If the

Contractor does not keep an accurate set of as-built drawings, the pay request may be altered or delayed at the request of the Architect. Mark the drawings with a colored pencil. Delivery of as-built prints and reproducibles is a condition of final acceptance.

4. The record prints shall be updated on a daily basis and shall indicate accurate dimensions

for all buried or concealed work, precise locations of all concealed pipe or duct, locations of all concealed valves, controls and devices and any deviations from the work shown on the Construction Documents which are required for coordination. All dimensions shall include at least two dimensions to permanent structure points.

5. Submit three prints of the tracings for approval. Make corrections to tracings as directed

and delivered "Auto Positive Tracings" to the architect. "As-Built" drawings shall be furnished in addition to shop drawings.

6. When the option described in paragraph F., above is not exercised then upon completion

of the work, the Contractor shall transfer all marks from the submit a set of clear concise set of reproducible record "AS-BUILT" drawings and shall submit the reproducible drawings with corrections made by a competent draftsman and three (3) sets of black line prints to the Architect or Engineer for review prior to scheduling the final inspection at the completion of the work. The reproducible record "AS-BUILT" drawings shall have the Engineers Name and Seal removed or blanked out and shall be clearly marked and signed on each sheet as follows:

CERTIFIED RECORD DRAWINGS

DATE:

(NAME OF GENERAL CONTRACTOR)

BY:_______________________________

(SIGNATURE)

(NAME OF SUBCONTRACTOR)

BY:_______________________________

Page 155: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

16050 - 10 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 3/11

(SIGNATURE) 1.16 CERTIFICATIONS AND TEST REPORTS

A. Submit a detailed schedule for completion and testing of each system indicating scheduled dates for completion of system installation and outlining tests to be performed and schedule date for each test. This detailed completion and test schedule shall be submittal at least 90 days before the projected Project completion date.

B. Test result reporting forms shall be submitted for review no later than the date of the

detailed schedule submitted.

C. Submit 4 copies of all certifications and test reports to the Architect or Engineer for review adequately in advance of completion of the Work to allow for remedial action as required to correct deficiencies discovered in equipment and systems.

D. Certifications and test reports to be submitted shall include, but not be limited to those

items outlined in Section of Division 16. 1.17 MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Coordinate with Division 1 for maintenance manual requirements, unless noted otherwise bind together in “D ring type” binders by National model no. 79-883 or equal, binders shall be large enough to allow ¼” of spare capacity. Three (3) sets of all approved shop drawing submittals, fabrication drawings, bulletins, maintenance instructions, operating instructions and parts exploded views and lists for each and every piece of equipment furnished under this Specification. All sections shall be typed and indexed into sections and labeled for easy reference and shall utilize the individual specification section numbers shown in the Electrical Specifications as an organization guideline. Bulletins containing information about equipment that is not installed on the project shall be properly marked up or stripped and reassembled. All pertinent information required by the Owner for proper operation and maintenance of equipment supplied by Division 16 shall be clearly and legibly set forth in memoranda that shall, likewise, be bound with bulletins.

B. Prepare maintenance manuals in accordance with Special Project Conditions, in addition

to the requirements specified in Division 16, include the following information for equipment items:

1. Identifying names, name tags designations and locations for all equipment. 2. Fault Current calculations and Coordination Study. 3. Reviewed shop drawing submittals with exceptions noted compliance letter. 4. Fabrication drawings. 5. Equipment and device bulletins and data sheets clearly highlighted to show

equipment installed on the project and including performance curves and data as applicable, i.e., description of function, normal operating characteristics and limitations, performance curves, engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and model numbers of replacement parts.

6. Manufacturer's printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in, and routine and normal operating instructions; regulation, control, stopping, shutdown, and emergency instructions; and summer and winter operating instructions.

7. Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and troubleshooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly; aligning and adjusting instructions, servicing instructions and lubrication charts and schedules.

8. Equipment name plate data. 9. Wiring diagrams.

Page 156: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

16050 - 11 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 3/11

10. Exploded parts views and parts lists for all equipment and devices. 11. Color coding charts for all painted equipment and conduit. 12. Location and listing of all spare parts and special keys and tools furnished to the

Owner. 13. Furnish recommended lubrication schedule for all required lubrication points with

listing of type and approximate amount of lubricant required.

C. Refer to Division 1 for additional information on Operating and Maintenance Manuals.

D. Operating and Maintenance Manuals shall be turned over to the Owner or Engineer a minimum of 14 working days prior to the beginning of the operator training period.

1.18 OPERATOR TRAINING

A. The Contractor shall furnish the services of factory trained specialists to instruct the Owner's operating personnel. The Owner's operator training shall include 12 hours of on site training in three 4 hour shifts.

B. Before proceeding with the instruction of Owner Personnel, prepare a typed outline in triplicate, listing the subjects that will be covered in this instruction, and submit the outline for review by the Owner. At the conclusion of the instruction period obtain the signature of each person being instructed on each copy of the reviewed outline to signify that he has a proper understanding of the operation and maintenance of the systems and resubmit the signed outlines.

C. Refer to other Division 16 Sections for additional Operator Training requirements.

1.19 SITE VISITATION

A. Visit the site of the proposed construction in order to fully understand the facilities, difficulties and restriction attending the execution of the work.

B. Before submitting a bid, it will be necessary for each Contractor whose work is involved to

visit the site and ascertain for himself the conditions to be met therein in installing his work and make due provision for same in his bid. It will be assumed that this Contractor in submitting his bid has visited the premises and that his bid covers all work necessary to properly install the equipment shown. Failure on the part of the Contractor to comply with this requirement shall not be considered justification for the omission or faulty installation of any work covered by these Specifications and Drawings.

C. Understand the existing utilities from which services will be supplied; verify locations of

utility services, and determine requirements for connections.

D. Determine in advance that equipment and materials proposed for installation fit into the confines indicated.

1.20 WARRANTY

A. The undertaking of the work described in this Division shall be considered equivalent to the issuance, as part of this work, of a specific guarantee extending one year beyond the date of completion of work and acceptance by Owner, against defects in materials and workmanship. Materials, appliances and labor necessary to effect repairs and replacement so as to maintain said work in good functioning order shall be provided as required. Replacements necessitated by normal wear in use or by Owner's abuse are not included under this guarantee.

Page 157: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

16050 - 12 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 3/11

B. All normal and extended warranties shall include parts, labor, miscellaneous materials,

travel time, incidental expenses, freight/shipping, refrigerant, oils, lubricants, belts, filters and any expenses related to service call required to diagnose warranty problems.

1.21 TRANSFER OF ELECTRONIC FILES

A. Project documents are not intended or represented to be suitable for reuse by Architect/Owner or others on extensions of this project or on any other project. Any such reuse or modification without written verification or adaptation by Engineer, as appropriate for the specific purpose intended, will be at Architect/Owner’s risk and without liability or legal exposure to Engineer or its consultants from all claims, damages, losses and expense, including attorney’s fees arising out of or resulting thereof.

B. Because data stored in electric media format can deteriorate or be modified inadvertently, or otherwise without authorization of the data’s creator, the party receiving the electronic files agrees that it will perform acceptance tests or procedures within sixty (60) days of receipt, after which time the receiving party shall be deemed to have accepted the data thus transferred to be acceptable. Any errors detected within the sixty (60) day acceptance period will be corrected by the party delivering the electronic files. Engineer is not responsible for maintaining documents stored in electronic media format after acceptance by the Architect/Owner.

C. When transferring documents in electronic media format, Engineer makes no representations as to the long term compatibility, usability or readability of documents resulting from the use of software application packages, operating systems, or computer hardware differing from those used by Engineer at the beginning of the Project.

D. Any reuse or modifications will be Contractor’s sole risk and without liability or legal exposure to Architect, Engineer or any consultant.

E. The Texas Board of Architectural Examiners (TBAE) has stated that it is in violation of Texas law for persons other than the Architect of record to revise the Architectural drawings without the Architect’s written consent.

It is agreed that “MEP” hard copy or computer-generated documents will not be issued to any other party except directly to the Architect/Owner. The contract documents are contractually copyrighted and cannot be used for any other project or purpose except as specifically indicated in AIA B-141 Standard Form of Agreement between Architect and Owner.

If the client, Architect/Owner, or developer of the project requires electronic media for “record purposes”, then an AutoCAD based compact disc (“CD”) will be prepared. The “CD” will be submitted with all title block references intact and will be formatted in a “plot” format to permit the end user to only view and plot the drawings. Revisions will not be permitted in this configuration.

F. At the Architect/Owner’s request, Engineer will prepare one “CD” of electronic media to assist the contractor in the preparation of submittals. The Engineer will prepare and submit the “CD” to the Architect/Owner for distribution to the contractor. All copies of the “CD” will be reproduced for a cost of reproduction fee of Five Hundred Dollars ($500.00) per “CD”.

The “CD” will be prepared and all title blocks, names and dates will be removed. The “CD” will be prepared in a “.dwg” format to permit the end user to revise the drawings.

Page 158: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

16050 - 13 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 3/11

G. This Five Hundred Dollars ($500.00) per “CD” cost of reproduction will be paid directly from the Contractor to the Engineer. The “CD” will be prepared only after receipt of the Five Hundred Dollars ($500.00). The Five Hundred Dollars ($500.00) per “CD” cost of reproduction is to only recover the cost of the manhours necessary to reproduce the documents. It is not a contractual agreement between the Contractor and Engineer to provide any engineering services, nor any other service.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. The names and manufacturers and model numbers have been used in the Contract documents to establish types of equipment and standards of quality. Where more than one manufacturer is named for a specific item of equipment, only one of the specified manufacturers will be considered for approval. Where only one manufacturer is mentioned with the phrase "or approved equal", Contractor may submit an alternate manufacturer for consideration, provided the following conditions are met:

1. Submit alternate equipment with complete descriptive data in shop drawing form.

Provide sample of equipment upon request for review by Architect. Samples will be returned if requested in writing.

2. Alternate equipment must be equal from the standpoint of materials, construction and performance.

3. Alternate submittal must be presented to the Engineer/Architect ten (10) days prior to bid date for approval.

B. The Architect and Engineer shall be the sole judge of quality and equivalence of

equipment, materials and methods. 2.02 All materials and products used on this project shall be listed by Underwriters' Laboratories. 2.03 ACCESS DOORS

A. Wherever access is required in walls or ceilings to concealed junction boxes, pull boxes, equipment, etc., installed under this Division, furnish a hinged access door and frame with flush latch handle to another Division for installation. Doors shall be as follows:

1. Plaster Surfaces: Milcor Style K. 2. Ceramic Tile Surfaces: Milcor Style M. 3. Drywall Surfaces: Milcor Style DW. 4. Install panels only in locations approved by the Architect.

2.04 EQUIPMENT PADS

A. Unless noted otherwise 4" high concrete pads for floor mounted equipment shall be installed under Division 3. Pads shall conform to the shape of the equipment with a minimum of 3" margin at equipment supports. Top and sides of pads shall be troweled to a smooth finish, equal to floor. External corners shall be bullnosed to a 3/4" radius, unless shown otherwise.

2.05 ESCUTCHEONS

A. Provide heavy chrome or nickel plated plates, of approved pattern, on conduit passing through walls, floors and ceilings in finished areas. Where conduit passes through a sleeve, no point of the conduit shall touch the building construction. Caulk around such conduit with sufficient layers of two hour rated firesafing by Thermafiber 4.0 P.C.F. density, U.S.G. fire test 4/11/78 and seal off openings between conduit and sleeves with

Page 159: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

16050 - 14 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 3/11

non-hardening mastic prior to application of escutcheon plate. Escutcheons shall be Gravler Sure-Lock, or approved equal.

2.06 SPACE LIMITATIONS

A. Equipment shall be chosen which shall properly fit into the physical space provided and shown on the drawings, allowing ample room for access, servicing, removal and replacement of parts, etc. Adequate space shall be allowed for clearances in accordance with Code requirements. Physical dimensions and arrangement of equipment shall be subject to the approval of the Architect.

2.07 PAINTING

A. All factory assembled equipment for electrical work, except light fixtures, that normally is delivered with a factory applied finish shall be delivered with a hard surface factory applied finish such as baked-on machinery enamel which will not require additional field painting. The finish shall consist of not less than 2 coats of medium gray color paint USA No. 61 Munsell Notation 8-3G, 6. 10/0.54 enamel. This Contractor shall protect this finish from damage due to construction operations until acceptance of the building. He shall be responsible for satisfactorily restoring any such finishes or replacing equipment that becomes stained or damaged.

2.08 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION

A. Conduit Systems: Provide adequate marking of major conduit which is exposed or concealed in accessible spaces to distinguish each run as either a power or signal/communication conduit. Except as otherwise indicated, use orange banding with black lettering. Provide self-adhesive or snap-on type plastic markers. Indicate voltage for that raceway. Locate markers at ends of conduit runs, on pull boxes, on junction boxes, near switches and other control devices, near items of equipment served by the conductors, at points where conduit passes through walls or floors, or enters non-accessible construction and at spacings of not more than 50 feet along each run of conduit. Switch-leg conduit and short branches for power connections do not have to be marked, except where conduit is larger than ¾ inch. Branch circuit conduits, junction boxes and pull boxes shall be marked with a permanent marker indicating panel name and branch circuit numbers.

B. Underground Cable Identification: Bury a continuous, preprinted, bright colored plastic ribbon cable marker with each underground cable (or group of cables), regardless of whether conductors are in conduit, duct bank, or direct buried. Locate each directly over cables, 6 to 8 inches below finished grade.

C. Identification of Equipment:

1. All major equipment shall have a manufacturer’s label identifying the manufacturer’s address, equipment model and serial numbers, equipment size, and other pertinent data. Care shall be taken not to obliterate this nameplate in any way.

2. A black-white-black laminated plastic engraved identifying nameplate shall be secured by stainless steel screws to each automatic transfer switch, switchboard, distribution panel, motor control center, motor starter panels and panelboards. a. Identifying nameplates shall have ¼ inch high engraved letters and shall

contain the following information: 1) Name 2) Voltage

Page 160: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

16050 - 15 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 3/11

3) Phase 4) “3” or “4” wire, and 5) Where it is fed from.

b. An example of a panelboard nameplate is: Center Panel – 1HB 480/277 volt, 3 phase, 4 wire Center Fed from DP2

c. An example of an automatic transfer switch nameplate is: Center ATS #2 480/277 volt, 3 phase, 4 wire, 4 pole Center Fed from MSB and DPE

3. Each feeder device in a switchboard, distribution panel, and motor control center device shall have a nameplate showing the load served in ½ inch high engraved letters.

4. A black-white-black laminated plastic engraved identifying nameplate shall be secured by screws to each safety switch, disconnect switch, individual motor starter, enclosed circuit breaker, wireway, and terminal cabinet. a. Identifying nameplates shall have ¼ inch high engraved letters and shall

indicate the equipment served. b. An example if a disconnect switch is: AHU-1.

5. Cardholders and directory cards shall be furnished for circuit identification in panelboards. Cardholder shall be located on inside of panel door and shall be in a metal frame with clear plastic front. Circuit lists shall be typewritten. Circuit descriptions shall include location and name of each item of equipment served. Spares and spaces shall be written in erasable pencil for future use. Circuit directory shall show the room served by each circuit. The final graphs/signage room numbers shall be used. Do not use Architectural numbering on plans.

6. Prohibited Markings: Markings which are intended to identify the manufacturer, vendor, or other source from which the material has been obtained are prohibited for installation within public, tenant, or common areas within the project. Also, prohibited are materials or devices which bear evidence that markings or insignias have been removed. Certification, testing (example, Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc.), and approval labels are exceptions to this requirement.

7. Warning Signs: Provide warning signs where there is hazardous exposure associated with access to or operation of electrical facilities. Provide text of sufficient clarity and lettering of sufficient size to convey adequate information at each location; mount permanently in an appropriate and effective location. Comply with recognized industry standards for color and design.

8. Operational Tags: Where needed for proper and adequate information on operation and maintenance of electrical system, provide tags of plasticized card stock, either preprinted or hand printed. Tags shall convey the message, example: “DO NOT OPEN THIS SWITCH WHEN BURNER IS OPERATING.”

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING

A. Trenching and backfilling and other earthwork operations required to install the facilities specified herein shall conform to the applicable requirements of Division 2 (95% of maximum standard density). Where trenching or excavation is required in improved areas, the backfill shall be compacted to a condition equal to that of adjacent undisturbed earth and the surface of the area restored to the condition existing prior to trenching or excavating operations. Provide a minimum of 3” of sand underneath all conduits. The plans indicate information pertaining to surface and sub-surface obstructions; however, this information is not guaranteed. Should obstructions be encountered whether or not shown, the Contractor shall alter routing of new work, reroute existing lines, remove

Page 161: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

16050 - 16 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 3/11

obstructions where permitted, or otherwise perform whatever work is necessary to satisfy the purpose of new work and leave existing surfaces and structures in a satisfactory and serviceable condition. All work shall comply with OSHA Standards.

3.02 WORKMANSHIP AND CONCEALMENT

A. The work of this Section shall be performed by workman skilled in their trade. Installation shall be consistent in completeness whether concealed or exposed. Each item of electrical work shall be concealed in walls, chases, under floors and above ceilings except:

1. Where shown to be exposed. 2. Where exposure is necessary to the proper function.

3.03 SLEEVES, CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. This section shall be responsible for placing sleeves for all conduit passing through walls, partitions, sound walls, beams, floors, roof, etc. Sleeves through below-grade walls shall use water-tight fitting manufactured by O.Z. Gendey.

B. All cutting and patching will be done under another Division, but this Section will be

responsible for timely performance of this work and layout of holes and setting sleeves.

C. All un-used sleeves shall be sealed with 2 hour UL approved fire sealant manufactured by “3M” or approved equal.

D. Refer to 26 05 33 for additional requirements.

3.04 ELECTRICAL GEAR

A. Install all electrical equipment in accordance with the National Electrical Code and as shown on the drawings.

B. Lighting contractors, time clocks, disconnect switches, etc. mounted in

mechanical/electrical rooms shall be mounted at a working height not requiring a ladder, when wall space is available. Installation of these devices at greater elevations shall be approved by the Engineer. Contractor shall provide a coordination sketch of each mechanical/electrical room noting locations and mounting heights of all electrical devices(note bottom and top elevations) shown to be installed. Sketches shall be provided to the Engineer for review and the general contractor for coordination with other trades working in these rooms.

3.05 CLEANING

A. Clean lighting fixtures and equipment. B. Touch-up and refinish scratches and marred surfaces on panels, switches, starters, and

transformers. 3.06 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS

A. Tests and inspection requirements shall be coordinated with Division 1.

B. Date for final acceptance test shall be sufficiently in advance of completion date of contract to permit alterations or adjustments necessary to achieve proper functioning of

Page 162: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

16050 - 17 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 3/11

equipment prior to contract completion date.

C. Conduct re-tests as directed by Architect on portions of work or equipment altered or adjusted as determined to be necessary by final acceptance test. No resultant delay or consumption of time as a result of such necessary re-test beyond contract completion date shall relieve Contractor of his responsibility under contract.

D. Put circuits and equipment into service under normal conditions, collectively and

separately, as may be required to determine satisfactory operation. Demonstrate equipment to operate in accordance with requirements of these specifications. Perform tests in the presence of Architect. Furnish instruments and personnel required for tests.

E. Final Inspection:

1. At the time designated by the Architect, the entire system shall be inspected by

the Architect and Engineer. The contractor or his representative shall be present at this inspection.

2. Panelboards, switches, fixtures, etc., shall be cleaned and in operating condition. 3. Certificates and documents required hereinbefore shall be in order and presented

to the Architect prior to inspection. 4. Panel covers, junction box covers, etc., shall be removed for visual inspection of

the wire, bus bars, etc. 5. After the inspection, any items which are noted as needing to be changed or

corrected in order to comply with these specifications and the drawings shall be accomplished without delay.

END OF SECTION 16050

Page 163: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

02/11 16110-1

SECTION 16110

RACEWAYS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE

A. Provide electrical raceways and fittings as shown, scheduled and specified.

B. The types of raceways and fittings required are as follows:

1. Rigid hot-dipped galvanized steel conduit (RGS) 2. Intermediate hot-dipped galvanized steel conduit (IMC) 3. Electrical metallic tubing (EMT) 4. PVC 5. Flexible metal conduit 6. Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit (non-metallic is not acceptable) 7. PVC coated rigid galvanized steel conduit 8. Aluminum Rigid Conduit (ARC)

1.02 STANDARDS

A. ANSI, C80.1 & C80.3 B. NEMA FB-1 C. NEMA TC3 D. UL, 6, 797 & 1242

1.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Raceways

1. Allied 2. Triangle 3. Republic 3. Carlon 4. Wheatland Tube 5. Cantex 6. Western Tube 7. Robroy Industries

B. Fittings

1. Appleton 2. Crouse Hinds 3. Steel City 4. O.Z. Gedney 5. Carlon 6. Raco, Inc.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop drawing shall include but not be limited to:

Page 164: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

02/11 16110-2

1. Cutsheets for raceways and fitting.

1.05 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES WORK IN ACCORDANCE WITH:

A. National Electrical Code.

B. Local, municipal, or state codes that have jurisdiction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PROVIDE CONDUIT AS FOLLOWS:

A. Except as noted or otherwise specified, all wiring shall be installed in galvanized rigid steel, rigid aluminum conduit or electrical steel tube (EMT) of the proper size to contain the number of conductors required in accordance with the latest edition of the N.E.C. Where conduit sizes are shown on the drawings, these shall take preference. Contractor shall epoxy coat galvanized rigid steel conduit for use in natatoriums.

B. EMT in sizes up to 4 inches when concealed or not exposed to damage and located

indoors only.

C. PVC coated rigid galvanized steel shall be used for all penetrations of slab on grade.

D. Rigid galvanized steel where embedded in concrete or masonry construction, mechanical yard or in exterior/interior applications where subject to damage.

E. Rigid aluminum shall be used in exterior applications. (i.e. roof, top of canopies)

F. Carlon Schedule 40 PVC may be utilized underground, in or below slab where shown on the construction documents.

G. MINIMUM SIZE: [1/2], [3/4] inch. All homeruns shall be 3/4" minimum.

H. PVC coated rigid galvanized steel conduit shall be coated inside and outside.

I. PVC coated rigid galvanized steel conduit shall be used at cooling towers, corrosive areas

and pool pump rooms.

J. Fixture whips: Refer to 16510 for additional information.

K. Flexible metal shall be used for connecting rotating equipment installed in conditioned spaces.

L. Sealtite shall be used for connecting rotating equipment installed in non-conditioned

spaces and outside.

M. Bear the stamped approval of the UL and be approved by the Architect and Engineer.

2.02 Branch circuits run underground shall be run in Carlon Schedule 40 PVC conduit. Install ground

wire in accordance with NEC table 250-122. 2.03 FITTINGS

Page 165: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

02/11 16110-3

A. Couplings for rigid steel or intermediate conduit shall be hot dipped galvanized steel. Set screw type is not acceptable.

B. Steel or malleable iron fittings shall be used on all other raceway types except for PVC.

C. Couplings for aluminum raceways shall be threaded aluminum.

D. EMT systems shall utilize steel insulated throat, set screw connectors and steel set screw

couplings in all indoor conditioned spaces. EMT system shall utilize steel insulated throat, threadless, watertight compression type connectors and steel threadless watertight compression type coupling in all non-conditioned spaces.

D. Coupling and connectors accessories and fittings for PVC coated rigid galvanized steel

shall be PVC coated.

E. Metal sealtite fittings shall be steel. Plastic is not acceptable.

F. Provide nylon bushing on end of all low voltage cabling system conduits (sleeves, rough-ins, etc.).

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 CONDUIT

A. GENERAL The Drawings are diagrammatic, and are intended to show the general location of outlets, devices, fixtures, and arrangement and control of circuits. The Contractor shall determine exact locations by actual measurement of the building or by reference to the Architectural Drawings.

B. Of such size, and so installed that conductors may be drawn in without injury or excessive

strain.

C. Where entering panels, pull boxes, junction boxes, or outlet boxes, shall be secured in place with lock nuts inside and outside, and insulated bushings inside.

D. Have Red seal type VCC or approved equal cable supports in risers, as required by

N.E.C.

E. Have ends reamed after cutting and application of die.

F. Keep conduit corked and dry during construction, and swab out before conductors are pulled.

G. Have bends and offsets made with approved tools. Bends or offsets in which the pipe is

crushed or deformed shall not be installed.

H. Where not embedded in concrete or masonry, be firmly secured by approved clamps, half-straps or hangers.

I. Have O.Z. Gedney or approved equal expansion fittings where crossing building

expansion joints.

J. EXPANSION JOINTS: Make provision for expansion and shifting of metal or PVC conduits where risers occur from underground.

Page 166: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

02/11 16110-4

K. Except in the mechanical equipment rooms, run conduit concealed, and by the shortest

practicable route between outlets. Install risers, drops, and offsets necessary to avoid conflict with ductwork, piping, structural members, and similar items.

L. Install exposed conduit in mechanical rooms, and elsewhere as indicated, parallel to

horizontal and vertical lines of walls, ceilings, and floors.

M. In general, fluorescent fixtures in finished areas having suspended acoustical ceilings shall be connected to outlet boxes of lighting grid by flexible metal conduit; length not to exceed ten feet.

N. Outlet boxes in partitions shall never be set back to back. They shall be offset to prevent

undue noise transmission from room to room.

O. Concealed conduit shall run in as direct manner as possible using long bends. Exposed conduit shall be run parallel with or at right angles to the lines of the building; and all bends shall be made with standard conduit elbows or conduit benders. Not more than equivalent of four quarter bends shall be used in any run between terminals and cabinet, of between outlet or junction boxes. Approved condulets shall be used in lieu of conduit elbows where ease of installation and appearance warrants their use and approved by the engineer. Conduit joints shall be made with approved couplings and unions.

P. Conduits shall be continuous from outlet to outlet and from outlets to cabinets, junction or

pull boxes and shall be electrically continuous throughout. Terminals of all conduits shall be provided with double lock nuts and bushing or terminated on conduit hubs. Use of running threads is prohibited.

Q. Each entire conduit system shall be installed complete before any conductors are drawn

in. Every run of conduit shall be finished before covering up to guard against obstructions and omissions.

R. Sleeves shall be placed in the forms of concrete, masonry and fire rated walls, floor slabs

and beams, for the passage of conduits. Sleeves should be set in place a sufficient time ahead of the concrete work so as not to delay the work. Sleeves shall be rigid galvanized steel and set to extend 4” above slab.

S. All pipe penetrations through walls and concrete floors shall be fire rated by applying USG

Thermafiber in the space between the concrete and the pipe. The fire rating shall be additionally sealed by using 3M brand model CP 25 or 303 fire barrier caulk and putty. All fire rating material shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions.

T. All conduit shall be cleaned and swabbed to remove all foreign matter and moisture prior

to pulling wire and cable. All boxes in which conduits terminate shall be cleaned of all concrete mortar and other foreign matter.

U. Provide #30 nylon pulling line in all conduits in which permanent wiring is not installed.

V. All conduit shall be securely fastened and supported using hot galvanized malleable iron

one-hole pipe straps, clamps, hanger or other means approved by the engineer. Supports shall be as required by NEC Table 344-3 (B)(2). Tie wire shall not be used as support or securing means. Support conduit independently of ceiling hanger wire. Use all thread rods to support outlet boxes, junction boxes and conduit.

W. When PVC conduit is routed underground, all stub-up's and 90° elbows shall be PVC

Page 167: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

02/11 16110-5

coated rigid galvanized steel. Use PVC coated rigid galvanized steel when penetrating concrete on grade.

X. Route all conduit above grade unless otherwise noted on the construction documents.

Y. Contact the Architect and Engineer for an installation review before covering any below

grade or above grade conduit. Z. All new outlets shall be flush mounted. In remodeled areas where wall construction

prohibits flush mounting, provide wiremold 2400 series. Verify exact location and routing with architect before installation.

AA. Contractor shall not penetrate water proof barriers without using proper fitting to maintain

barriers. This shall include exterior walls and slabs. Coordinate with Architect for proper methods.

3.02 FITTINGS

A. Install approved expansion fitting in all conduit runs in excess of 150 feet or when crossing building expansion joints.

3.03 CONDUIT CORROSION PROTECTION

A. Branch circuit conduits installed in concrete slabs on fill or grade shall be positioned in a manner to ensure complete concrete cover. In no case shall such conduits be exposed below or above the slab surfaces, or penetrate the waterproof membrane.

B. At locations where metallic conduits pass through slabs on grade or transitions below

grade, PVC coated rigid galvanized conduit shall be used. 3.04 OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES

A. Provide an approved galvanized outlet box with adequate volume for number of conductors installed.

B. Provide standard galvanized switch boxes of the required number of gangs. Switch

boxes where conduit is exposed shall be handy boxes or approved equal.

C. Outlet boxes for receptacles shall be similar to Universal 52151 with suitable raised cover. Receptacle boxes where conduit is exposed shall be handy boxes or approved equal.

D. Weatherproof boxes shall be FS or FD. Provide these boxes in all non-conditioned areas,

exterior areas and natatoriums.

E. Outdoor boxes shall be NEMA 3R, with conduit connections made by Myers Hubs.

F. See notes and details on Drawings for special box requirements.

G. Provide junction boxes required to facilitate installation of the various conduit systems. Provide support boxes required for risers, each complete with approved cable supports as described elsewhere in this Division.

H. Outlet boxes for drywall shall be standard galvanized 4" square boxes with the

appropriate device cover.

I. Provide floor outlet fittings for telephone to match fittings for duplex floor receptacles.

Page 168: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

02/11 16110-6

J. Provide 3-1/2” deep gangable masonry boxes in all masonry wall (CMU). Steel City GW-

135-G or approved equal.

K. Provide shallow 4”x4” boxes in all demountable partitions.

L. Metallic boxes located in fire rated walls or partitions shall be separated by a minimum horizontal distance of 24 in. This minimum separation distance between metallic boxes may be reduced when “ Wall Opening Protective Materials” (CLIV) are installed according to the requirements of their Classification. Metallic boxes shall not be installed on opposite side of walls or partitions of staggered stud construction unless “Wall Opening Protective Materials” are installed with the metallic boxes in accordance with Classification requirements for the protective materials.

M. Junction, pull boxes, condulets, gutters, disconnects, contactors, etc., above 2-foot x 2-

foot grid ceilings shall be mounted within 18-inches of ceiling grid. Above 2-foot x 4 – foot grid ceiling they shall be mounted within 30-inches of ceiling grid. All junction box, pull box, gutter openings shall be side or bottom accessible.

3.05 THRU-WALL SEALS

A. Provide O.Z. Gedney “Thru-wall” seals for all conduits passing through concrete structure

below grade, above grade, and floor penetrations below grade. These prevent moisture from entering the building.

B. Straight sleeves are not acceptable.

3.06 PULL BOXES

A. Pull boxes shall be provided for conduit systems as required and shall be constructed of galvanized steel of not less than gauge and size specified by National Electrical Code.

B. Where two or more feeders pass through a common pull box, they shall be tagged to

indicate clearly their electrical characteristics, circuit number, and panel designation. 3.07 WIREWAYS

A. Wireways shall be installed as indicated or required and locations shall be coordinated with architect.

B. Wireways shall be made of not less than 16-gauge sheet steel for 4 inch and 6 inch

square sizes and 14 gauge steel for 8 inch and 12 inch square sizes. Couplings end plates, and knockouts shall be furnished as required. Each section of wireways shall be rigidly supported.

C. Wiring in wireways shall be neatly bundled, tied and suitably tagged. D. The finish shall be ANSI-49 gray epoxy paint applied by a cathodic electrodeposition paint

process over a corrosion resistant phosphate preparation for NEMA 1 wireways. Provide galvanized steel for NEMA 3R wireways. NEMA 3R wireways and auxiliary gutters are for horizontal mounting only.

END OF SECTION

Page 169: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

03/11 16120-1

SECTION 16120

WIRE, CABLE AND RELATED MATERIALS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE

A. Provide 600 volt building wire, cable and connectors and 300 volt wire, cable and connectors.

B. WORK INCLUDED: Include the following Work in addition to items normally part of this

Section.

1. Wiring for lighting and power. 2. Automatic Control Wiring. 3. Connection of equipment shown. 4. Fire Alarm System.

C. WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE:

1. Heating, ventilating, and air conditioning equipment. 2. Structured cabling system. 3. Coaxial cables

1.02 STANDARDS

A. UL83 B. ASTM B-3

C. All wire cable and connectors shall be UL approved.

1.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. 600 VOLT WIRE AND CABLE

1. Southwire 2. Encore 3. Cerro 4. Tyco Thermal Controls

B. 300 VOLT WIRE AND CABLE

1. Westpenn 2. Beldon 3. Alpha 4. Tappan-Southwire

C. FLEXIBLE CABLE SYSTEMS

1. AFC Modular Cable Systems

D. CONNECTORS

1. AMP-TYCO

Page 170: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

03/11 16120-2

2. Burndy 3. Ideal 4. 3M 5. O.Z. Gedney 6. Thomas & Betts

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop drawings shall include, but not limited to:

1. Cutsheets of wire, cable and connectors to indicate the performance, fabrication procedures, product variations, and accessories.

1.05 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES WORK IN ACCORDANCE WITH:

A. National Electrical Code.

B. Local, municipal, or state codes that have jurisdiction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 WIRING

A. All wire shall be new and continuous without weld, splice, or joints throughout its length. It must be uniform in cross-section, free from flaws, scales and other imperfections.

B. WIRE MATERIAL: Soft drawn, annealed, 98% pure copper, with tin coating. Aluminum

wiring is not acceptable.

C. TYPES:

1. Provide type “THHN/THWN” insulation for all buried feeders and service entrance conductors.

2. Provide type “THHN/THWN” insulation for all branch circuits and above grade feeders.

3. All wire No. 8 and larger shall be stranded. All wire No. 10 and smaller shall be stranded or solid.

4. Provide type "XHHW" or other 90 degrees insulation wiring for branch circuit wiring installed through continuous rows of fluorescent fixture bodies.

5. All 300-volt cable including but not limited to telephone, fire alarm, data, CATV and security shall be UL listed for use in return air plenums.

D. CONDUCTOR SIZES

1. Feeder conductors shall be sized for a maximum of 2% drop in rated voltage at

scheduled load. 2. Branch circuit conductors shall be sized for a maximum 3% drop in the rated

voltage to the longest outlet on the circuit. 3. Minimum wire shall be No. 12, unless otherwise shown on Drawings or required

by Code

E. COLOR CODING: No. 6 or larger shall use tape for color coding. No. 8 and smaller wire

shall be color coded in accordance with the governing authority requirements or as follows:

Page 171: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

03/11 16120-3

120/208 VOLT 277/480 VOLT 120/240 VOLT NEUTRAL: White Neutral: Gray Neutral: White PHASE A: Black Phase A: Brown Phase A: Black PHASE B: Red Phase B: Purple Phase B: Orange PHASE C: Blue Phase C: Yellow Phase C: Blue GROUND: Green Ground: Green Ground: Green

2.02 GROUNDING

Permanently connect all conduit work, motors, starters, and other electrical equipment to grounding system in accordance with the National Electrical Code.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 WIRE

A. Do not pull wire into conduit until Work of an injurious nature is completed. Where two or more circuits run to a single outlet box, each circuit shall be properly tagged. Wyreze or approved equal may be used as a lubricant where necessary.

B. Splices shall be fully made up in outlet boxes with compression crimp-on type splice

connectors.

C. Joints and splices will not be permitted in service entrance or in feeders. Joints in branch circuits will be permitted where branch circuits divide, and then shall consist of one through-circuit to which the branch shall be spliced. Joints shall not be left for the fixture hanger to make. Connect joints and splices with Buchanan Series "2000" solderless connectors complete with insulating caps or properly sized wire nuts.

D. All stranded conductors shall be furnished with lugs or connectors.

E. Connectors furnished with circuit breakers or switches shall be suitable for copper wire

termination.

F. “Sta-Cons” shall be used to terminate stranded conductors on all switches and receptacles.

G. Metal Clad Cable - Type MC

1. Not Allowed.

G. Armored Cable - Type AC

1. Not Allowed.

H. All stranded #10 and small conductors shall be terminated with an approved solderless terminal if the device or light fixture does not have provisions for clamp type securing of the conductor.

I. The jacket for all travelers used on 3-way and 4-way switches shall be pink.

3.02 BALANCING SYSTEM

The load on each distribution and lighting panel shall be balanced to within 10% by proper

Page 172: HASKIN PARK...300 Concrete 301 Reinforcing Steel 303 Welded Wire Flat Sheets 306 Structural Excavation 307 Concrete Structures 400 Trenching and Backfilling 402 High Density …

03/11 16120-4

arrangement of branch circuits on the different phase legs. Provide written documentation showing results. Submit with O & M manuals.

3.03 LOW VOLTAGE WIRING

A. Low voltage wiring shall be plenum rated. All wiring in mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, drywall ceiling, inaccessible areas, underground, plaster ceiling, inside concealed walls areas exposed to occupant view, and other areas subject to physical damage shall be run in conduit.

B. Low voltage wiring shall be routed in separate raceways from power wiring systems.

C. Sleeves shall be placed in the forms of concrete, masonry and fire rated walls, floor slabs and beams, for the passage of wiring. Sleeves should be set in place a sufficient time ahead of the concrete work so as not to delay the work. Sleeves shall be rigid galvanized steel.

3.04 CABLE SUPPORTS

A. Provide cable supports in all vertical raceways in accordance with Article 300-19 of the NEC.

3.05 DEFECTS

A. Defects shall include, but are not to limited to, the following:

1. Tripping circuit breakers under normal operation. 2. Improperly connected equipment. 3. Damaged, torn, or skinned insulation.

END OF SECTION